Philips MDR533H MDR535H MDR537H F7 Dfu Aen

Owner's Manual

MDR533H

MDR535H

MDR537H

HDD & DVD RecoRDeR

witH Digital tuneR

Thank you for choosing Magnavox.

need help fasT?

ReaD youR Quick guiDe anD/oR owneR's Manual fiRst foR Quick tips tHat Make using

youR MagnaVox pRoDuct MoRe enjoyable.

if you HaVe ReaD youR instRuctions anD still neeD assistance,

you May access ouR online Help at www.Magnavox.coM/supporT

oR call 1-800-605-8610 wHile witH youR pRoDuct.

Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

INSTRUCCIONES EN ESPAÑOL INCLUIDAS.

The model and serial numbers of this unit may be found on the cabinet.

You should record and retain those numbers for future reference.

Please refer to the back cover of the manual for more Limited Warranty information.

Serial No.:

Model No.:

2

E

N

EN

SAFETY INFORMATION

F

CC

WARNIN

G

T

his equipment may generate or use radio

f

requency energy. Changes or modi

f

ications to this equipment may

cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the manual. The user could lose the

authority to operate this equipment i

f

an unauthorized change or modi

f

ication is made

.

RADIO-TV INTERFERENC

E

T

his equipment has been tested and

f

ound to comply with the limits

f

or a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

f

requency energy and, i

f

not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that inter

f

erence will not occur in a particular installation. I

f

this equipment does cause harm

f

ul

inter

f

erence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o

ff

and on, the user

is encouraged to try to correct the inter

f

erence by one or more o

f

the

f

ollowing measures

:

1

)

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

.

2

)

Increase t

h

e separation

b

etween t

h

e equipment an

d

receiver

.

3

)

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di

ff

erent

f

rom that to which the receiver is connected.

4

)

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician

f

or help.

Disconnect the AC plug to shut the unit o

ff

when trouble is

f

ound or not in use. The AC plug shall remain readily

available

.

Safety Instructions

W

ARNING

:

T

O REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

A

PPARATU

S

T

O

RAIN

O

R M

O

I

S

TURE.

A

PPARATUS SHALL NOT BE EXPOSED TO DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND NO OBJECTS

FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

C

AUTI

O

N

:

T

O REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

REMOVE COVER

(

OR BACK

)

. NO USER SERVICEABLE

PART

S

IN

S

IDE. REFER

S

ERVI

C

ING T

O

Q

UALIFIED

S

ERVICE PERSONNEL

.

C

AUTIO

N

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

T

he exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the presence of important

operatin

g

and maintenance (servicin

g

) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

T

he lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

e

quilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the

product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude

t

o constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

Important notes and ratings are located on the rear or

b

ottom of the cabinet

.

IMP

O

RTANT

S

AFETY IN

S

TRU

C

TI

O

N

S

1.

R

ead

t

h

ese

in

st

r

uct

i

o

n

s.

2

. Keep t

h

ese instructions

.

3

. Heed all warnin

g

s

.

4

. Fo

ll

ow a

ll

instructions.

5

. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6.

Clean onl

y

with dr

y

cloth.

7. Do not block an

y

ventilation o

p

enin

g

s. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

ypg

yp

8

. Do not insta

ll

near an

y

h

eat sources suc

h

as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

yy

apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce

g

h

eat.

pp

9. Do not defeat the safet

y

p

ur

p

ose of the

polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized

yp pyp p

pl

u

g

h

as two

bl

a

d

es wit

h

one wi

d

er t

h

an t

h

e

pggyppgp

g g yp p g p

other. A grounding type plug has two blades

pgg

and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or

ggyppgggyppg

the third prong are provided for your safety. If

ggpgggpg

the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,

pg p y y

consult an electrician for replacement of the

ppg y

pg y

o

b

so

l

ete out

l

et

.

1

0.

Protect the power cord from being walked on

or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

pg

p

receptacles, and the point where they exit from

pp ypg

pypg

the apparatus.

p

1

1.

Only use attachments/accessories specified by

the manufacturer.

y

12.

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table specified by the

yp

y

m

anu

f

acturer, or so

ld

wit

h

t

h

e

py

apparatus. When a cart is used, use

c

aution w

h

en movin

g

t

h

e cart/

pp

apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

g

1

3

.

Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms

or when unused for long periods of time.

p g pp g g g

gpp gg

14

.

Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has

gq p

qp

b

een

d

ama

g

e

d

in an

y

wa

y

, suc

h

as

p

ower-

gq pp

gq

supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been

gyy pgyy p

spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,

pp y p g g q

the apparatus has been exposed to rain or

pj pp

pj

moisture, does not operate normally, or has

pp p

p

b

een

d

roppe

d

.

T

he s

y

mbol for CLASS ll (Double Insulation

)

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 2 2013/02/12 21:06:06

3

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingConnections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

Introduction

SAFETY INFORMATION

C

A

U

TI

O

N

:

D

anger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type

.

WARNING:

B

atteries (Batter

y

pack or batter

y

installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like

.

LASER SAFETY

T

his a

pp

aratus is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.

T

his apparatus emplo

y

s a laser. Onl

y

a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt

to service this apparatus, due to possible eye injury

.

C

AUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposur

e

IMP

O

RTANT

CO

PYRIGHT INF

O

RMATI

ON

Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited. This item incorporates

c

opy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.

Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

Do not place the unit on the furniture that is capable of being tilted b

y

a child and an adult leaning, pulling, standing

o

r climbing on it. A falling unit can cause serious injury or even death

.

Never use a gas duster on this unit.

T

he gas trapped inside of this unit may cause ignition and explosion

.

To Avoid the Hazards o

f

Electrical Shock and Fire

• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands

.

•

Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it

f

rom an AC outlet. Grasp it by the plug

.

• Do not put

y

our fingers or objects into the unit

.

L

ocation and Handling

• Do not install the unit in direct sunlight, near strong magnetic

f

ields, or in a place sub

j

ect to dust or strong vibration

.

•

Avoid a place with drastic temperature changes

.

• This apparatus should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is

provided. Make sure to leave a space of 3.9 inches (10cm) or more around this apparatus

.

•

Depending on the environment, the temperature o

f

this unit may increase slightly. This is not a mal

f

unction.

• Be sure to remove the disc and unplug the AC power cord from the outlet before carr

y

ing the unit.

D

ew Con

d

ensation Warnin

g

• Dew condensation ma

y

form inside the unit in the following conditions. If so, do not use this unit at least for a few

hours until its inside gets dr

y

.

- The unit is moved

f

rom a cold place to a warm place

.

- Under conditions of high humidity

.

- A

f

ter heating a cold room

.

N

ote about Rec

y

cling

• This unit’s packaging materials are rec

y

clable and can be reused. Please dispose of an

y

materials in

accordance with your local recycling regulations

.

•

Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local

re

g

ulations concernin

g

chemical wastes

.

• For product recycling information, please visit - www.magnavox.co

m

Notice for Progressive Scan Output

• Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may

cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of picture problems with 480 progressive scan output, it

is recommended that the user switch the connection to the ‘standard definition’ output. If there are questions

regarding your TV set compatibility with this 480p DVD recorder, please contact our customer service center

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 3 2013/02/12 21:06:06

4

E

N

EN

SAFETY INFORMATION

Owner’s Manual

Servicin

g

• Please refer to relevant to

p

ics on “TROUBLESHOOTING”

on pa

g

es 116-120 before returnin

g

the product.

• If this unit becomes inoperative, do not try to correct

the problem b

y

ourself. There are no user-serviceable

parts inside. Turn the unit to the standb

y

mode, unplug

the power plu

g

and please call our help line mentioned

on the front pa

g

e to locate an Authorized Service

C

enter

.

Maintenance

C

l

eanin

g

t

h

e ca

b

ine

t

g

•

Wipe the front panel and other exterior surfaces of the

u

ni

t

wi

t

h

a

so

f

t

c

l

ot

h

.

•

Never use a solvent

,

thinner

,

benzene or alcohol to clean

t

he unit. Do not spra

y

insecticide liquid near the unit.

Such chemicals ma

y

discolor the surface or damage the

unit.

Cleanin

g

disc

s

g

•

When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning

cloth. Wipe the disc from the center to out. Do not

w

ipe in a circular motion.

•

Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,

commercially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive

cleaning agents or antistatic spray intended for analog

r

eco

r

ds.

Cleanin

g

the disc lens

g

•

If this unit still does not perform properly

although you refer to the relevant sections and to

“

TROUBLESHOOTING” in this owner's manual, the laser

optical pickup unit ma

y

be dirt

y

. Consult

y

our dealer

or an Authorized Service Center

f

or inspection and

cleaning o

f

the laser optical pickup unit

.

Disc handlin

g

•

Handle the discs so that

f

ingerprints and dust do not

adhere to the sur

f

aces o

f

the discs

.

•

A

l

ways store t

h

e

d

isc in its protective case w

h

en it is

not use

d.

HDD handlin

g

•

HDD is a precision apparatus that is susceptible

t

o vibration, strong impact or dirt. Depending on

th

e insta

ll

ation environment or

h

an

dl

ing, t

h

e unit

may

b

ecome partia

ll

y

d

amage

d

or in t

h

e worst

case, recor

d

ing or rep

l

aying may not

b

e avai

l

a

bl

e.

E

specia

ll

y w

h

i

l

e t

h

e HDD is in motion,

d

o not su

b

ject

i

t to vi

b

ration or strong impact or pu

ll

out t

h

e power

plug. And i

f

a power

f

ailure occurs, the content o

f

the

recor

d

ing / rep

l

aying program may

b

e

l

ost.

•

HDD rotates at

h

ig

h

spee

d

w

h

en in operation. Be sure

th

at rotation

h

as stoppe

d

an

d

t

h

en move t

h

e unit

w

ithout subjecting it to strong impact or vibration

.

IR si

g

na

l

c

h

ec

k

g

If the remote control does not work properly, you can test

if the remote control sends out the infrared signal with

a

d

igita

l

camera. (Wit

h

a

d

igita

l

camera or ce

ll

u

l

ar p

h

one

inc

l

u

d

ing

b

ui

l

t-in camera.

)

1

T

urn on t

h

e

d

igita

l

camera

.

2

D

irect a di

g

ital camera to remote control,

t

hen

p

ress and hold a button on the remote

c

ontrol

.

•

If

in

f

rared light appears through digital

camera, the remote control is working

.

Supplied Accessories

Remote Control (NC003UD / NC003UH)

with AA (1.5 V) batter

y

x2

RCA audio/video cables

Owner’s Manua

l

Quic

k

Start Gui

d

e

RF coaxia

l

ca

bl

e

Note

• Cannot guarantee about 3rd party’s remote controls.

Please contact the remote manu

f

acturer i

f

you have

any problem with it.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 4 2013/02/12 21:06:06

5

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingConnections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

Introduction

SAFETY INFORMATION

M

AGNAVOX is a registered trademark of Philips Electronics North America Corporation and is used by Funai Electric

Co., Ltd. and Funai Corporation, Inc. under license from Philips Electronics North America

.

A

ll rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, transcribed,

downloaded or stored in any storage medium, in any form or for any purpose without the express prior written

consent of Funai. Furthermore, any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is

strictly prohibited

.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Funai reserves the right to change the content

h

erein without the obligation to noti

f

y any person or organization o

f

such changes

.

Trademark Information

Kodak and KODAK Picture CD Compatible

are trademarks of Kodak used under license

.

M

anufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories

.

Dolby® Digital Stereo Creato

r

“

Dolby® Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to

create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital

sound tracks at home. The technology, when utilized

instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc

space, allowing

f

or higher video resolution or extended

r

ecording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using

Dolby Digital Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD

-

V

ideo players.

”

N

ote

:

T

h

is is true w

h

en t

h

e p

l

ayers are compati

bl

e wit

h

actua

l r

eco

r

dab

l

e

DVD

d

i

scs.

T

he terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition

Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC in the United States and other

countries

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 5 2013/02/12 21:06:06

6

E

N

EN

CONTENTS

Introduction

I

Introduction

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Safet

y

Instruction

s

.

2

Su

pp

lied Accessorie

s

.

4

Ma

i

ntenanc

e

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

4

Trademark Informatio

n

.

5

FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Feature

s

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

8

Sym

b

o

l

s Use

d

in t

h

is Owner’s Manua

l

.

9

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . 10

Fr

o

n

t

P

a

n

el

.

1

0

R

ea

r P

a

n

el

.

11

R

e

m

ote

Co

n

t

r

ol

.

12

Front Panel Displa

y

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Connections

C

t

i

C

Connections

CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Antenna Connection (Re

q

uired

)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

O

v

e

rvi

ew

.

1

5

Connecting to a TV Using Audio / Video jack

s

.

1

6

C

onnecting to a TV Using the S-Video Out jack

.

1

6

Connecting to a T

V

U

sing Component Video Out jacks

.

1

7

Connecting to a T

V

with an HDMI Compatible Port

.

1

7

Connectin

g

to a Cable / Satellite Bo

x

.

1

9

Connecting to a T

V

without Audio / Video jacks

.

2

0

Digital Audio Connectio

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

1

Basic Setup

BiS

B

Basic Setup

BEFORE YOU START. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Finding the Viewing Channel on

y

our TV

.

22

Guide to On-Screen Display / Menu

.

23

M

a

in M

e

n

u

.

25

Switchin

g

HDD / DVD Mode

.

27

H

o

w

to

In

se

r

t

a

Di

sc

.

2

7

INITIAL SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

CHANNEL SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Auto Channel Scan

.

29

Adding / Deleting Channels

.

30

SETTING THE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Auto C

l

oc

k

Settin

g

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

Manual Clock Settin

g

.

3

4

Day

l

ig

h

t Saving Time

.

3

4

TUNER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Switchin

g

Analo

g

Mode / Di

g

ital Mode

.

35

Channel Selectio

n

.

3

5

Selecting TV Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

6

DTV Closed Captio

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

8

Closed Caption Styl

e

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

9

Recording

R

Recording

INFORMATION ON RECORDING . . 41

BEFORE RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

M

ake Recording Compatibl

e

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Setting for Auto Chapte

r

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Recording the DTV Closed Captio

n

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3

Recordin

g

from a Cable Box or Satellite . . . . . . . . 43

BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH

TIMER RECORDING. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

AUTOSTART RECORDING . . . . . . . . 46

TIMER RECORDING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Hints for Timer Recordin

g

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

SPECIAL RECORDING. . . . . . . . . . . . 52

O

verwriting

f

rom the Beginning o

f

the Title

.

5

2

O

verwriting in the Middle of the Title

.

52

Hints

f

or Overwritin

g

.

5

3

DUBBING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

In

f

ormation on Dubbin

g

.

54

Setting for an External Devic

e

.

55

Recordin

g

from an External Device

.

5

7

Information on DV Dubbin

g

.

58

DVC to HDD / DVD Dubbing

.

59

Selected Title Dubbin

g

.

6

1

O

ne Title Dubbing (HDD to DVD only

)

.

63

PROTECTING A DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

PLAYING THE DISCS

ON OTHER DVD PLAYERS. . . . . . . 65

Finalizing a Disc

.

65

A

uto Finalizin

g

.

6

Continued on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 6 2013/02/12 21:06:08

7

EN

Recording Playback EditingConnections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

Introduction

CONTENTS

Playback

P

Playback

INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK . . . 67

BASIC PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Direct Playbac

k

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

Playback from the Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

0

Playing Audio Discs and Picture Discs . . . . . . . . . . 7

2

Usin

g

the Title / Disc Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Paus

e

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

SPECIAL PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Resume Pla

y

bac

k

.

7

4

Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback

.

k

74

Variable Skip / Variable Repla

y

.

7

4

Rapid Playbac

k

.

74

Step by Step Playback

.

k

7

5

Slow Forward / Slow Reverse Playback

. . . . . . . . .

k

75

Chasing Playback during Recordin

g

. . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Simultaneous Pla

y

back and Recordin

g

.

7

5

Z

oom

.

7

6

Marker Settin

g

.

7

6

Repeat Pla

y

bac

k

.

7

Random Playback

.

k

7

S

l

i

d

e S

h

ow

.

77

Program Playback

.

k

7

8

Pla

y

ing Back the Autostart Recordin

g

.

7

8

SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Title / Chapter Search

.

7

9

Track Searc

h

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

9

Time Searc

h

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80

SELECTING THE FORMAT OF

AUDIO AND VIDEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Switching Subtitle

s

.

81

Switchin

g

Audio Soundtrac

k

.

81

Switchin

g

Camera An

g

le

s

.

8

2

Reducing Block Noise

.

8

2

Editing

E

Editing

INFORMATION ON EDITING. . . . . . 83

G

u

i

de

to

a

Ti

t

l

e

Li

st

.

83

E

d

i

t

M

e

n

u

.

84

How to Access the Edit Menu

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

84

EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Deletin

g

a Title

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

5

Deletin

g

Selected Title

s

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Putting Names on Tit

l

e

s

.

88

Chapter Marks (Add). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

89

Chapter Marks (Delete

)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

0

Chapter Marks (Delete All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1

Dividing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

2

Deleting a Scene of a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3

Protectin

g

a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

5

Hiding Chapter

s

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

6

S

etting an Index Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

7

Puttin

g

Name on Disc

.

98

Erasing Disc

.

99

M

aking Edits Compatibl

e

.

1

00

Deletin

g

All Titles in HD

D

.

1

01

Function Setup

F

Function Setup

FiS

LIST OF SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

SETUPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Playback

.

k

1

05

Disp

l

ay

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

09

Vi

d

e

o

.

112

H

D

M

I

.

1

4

Others

Oh

O

Others

TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Error Messag

e

.

12

0

LANGUAGE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Español

ñl

E

Español

ESPAÑOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Discos Reproducible

s

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

2

4

Códigos de Región

.

12

4

Disco Grabable

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4

Disco no Gra

b

a

bl

e

.

1

24

Conexión Básic

a

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

25

Conexión a un Televisor con un

Puerto Compatible con HDM

I

.

12

5

Confi

g

uración Inicial

.

126

Repro

d

ucción Directa

.

12

7

Gra

b

ación Básica

.

12

7

Co

p

iado Básic

a

.

12

8

LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . Back cover

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 7 2013/02/12 21:06:08

8

E

N

EN

FEATURES

Features

T

his unit not only plays back the contents on internal HDD, DVD, or CD, but also offers features for you to record on

HDD or DVD and edit them after that. The followin

g

features are offered with this unit

.

T

his unit allows

y

ou to record on the HDD, a DVD+RW/

-

RW

(

rewritable

)

and a DVD+R/-R

(

one-time write

)

. You can

choose an

y

one for

y

our convenience. Even if

y

ou choose

DVD-RW/-R, these discs will automaticall

y

be recorded in

t

h

e

DVD+VR m

ode.

HDD DVD

Up to 36 pro

g

ram recordin

g:

You can pro

g

ram the unit to record up to 36 pro

g

rams

w

ithin a one-month period. Daily or weekly program

recordin

g

s are also available

.

O

ne-touch timer recording (OTR):

You can easil

y

set a recording time as

y

ou prefer. Ever

y

t

im

e

[

REC

]

is pressed durin

g

recordin

g

, the recordin

g

t

ime will be increased b

y

30 minutes up to 6 hours. The

recording automaticall

y

stops when the recording time

y

ou set is reached or the disc is full.

A

utomatic chapter mark setting:

Chapter marks will be put on recordings as you set be

f

ore

a

ttempting to recor

d

.

A

utomatic title list making

:

T

he unit makes a title list with the index automaticall

y

.

L

eft channel stereo recording

:

T

hi

s

u

ni

t

ca

n r

eco

r

d

t

h

e

sou

n

d

o

f

t

h

e

l

e

f

t

c

h

a

nn

e

l

monaural input as left and right channels automaticall

y

(the input from the L2 jacks only)

.

HDD

320 GB hard disk

(

MDR533H

)

:

T

his unit is equipped with a 320GB hard disk which allows

y

ou to record up to 371 hours (with SLP mode). You

ca

n r

eco

r

d

f

o

r 12 h

ou

r

s

m

a

xim

u

m

at

a

t

im

e

wi

t

h

t

im

e

r

recor

d

ing. (6

h

ours w

h

en one-touc

h

recor

d

ing

)

500 GB hard disk(MDR535H):

T

his unit is equipped with a 500GB hard disk which allows

you to record up to 604 hours (with SLP mode). You

can record for 12 hours maximum at a time with timer

recording. (6 hours when one-touch recording

)

1

TB hard disk

(

MDR537H

)

:

T

his unit is equipped with a 1TB hard disk which allows

y

ou to record up to 1252 hours (with SLP mode). You

ca

n r

eco

r

d

f

o

r 12 h

ou

r

s

m

a

xim

u

m

at

a

t

im

e

wi

t

h

t

im

e

r

recording. (6 hours when one-touch recording

)

A

utostart recording

:

Ever

y

time

y

ou turn on this unit, this unit automaticall

y

records the channel currently viewed and temporarily

stores the recorded content to the HDD. By using this

function,

y

ou can pause or go back to the TV program

y

ou

a

re currently watching, and you can also start recording the

w

hole TV program even at the middle of the TV program

.

Recording

Dubbing

With this unit,

y

ou can enjo

y

bi-directional dubbing

bet

w

ee

n HDD

a

n

d

DVD

.

HDD DVD

Hi

g

h speed dubbin

g

(HDD

➔

DVD onl

y

)

:

If

y

ou dub a title recorded in SLP mode to DVD+R/-R,

dubbing speed will be 24 times at the maximum

.

Auto recording mode dubbing

:

When dubbing, if you set the recording mode to “Auto”,

the recording mode will automatically be adjusted so the

titles will fit nicely in the remaining space of the disc.

DV dubbing:

This function helps you to easily dub the contents of the

DVC (digital video camcorder) to HDD/DVD

.

DVD

Automatic title finalizing (DVD+R/DVD-RW/-R only):

You can finalize discs automatically after finishing all

timer recordings or at the end of the disc space if you set

t

his in the main menu.

Alternate recording:

In the following cases, the unit will detect it and

automatically record to the HDD even when DVD is

se

l

ecte

d

as t

h

e recor

d

ing me

d

ia.

-

If there is no recordable disc in the uni

t

-

If the disc does not have enou

g

h space to complete the

recordin

g

-

I

f

the material is “copy-once” program and prohibited to

be

r

eco

r

ded

o

n

a

DVD

-

If the disc is not available because the repairing process

is cancelled halfway

T

his

f

eature is available only

f

or timer recording. Not

available for one-touch timer recording.

All high definition (HD) pictures will be converted

d

own to Standard De

f

inition, when recording on the

HDD

o

r DVD

.

Copyright protection system

To play back the digital video images of a DVD via

an HDMI connection, it is necessary that both the

pla

y

er and the displa

y

device (or an AV amplifier)

support a copyright protection system called HDCP

(high-bandwidth digital content protection system).

HDCP is cop

y

protection technolog

y

that comprises

data encryption and authentication of the connected

AV device. This unit supports HDCP. Please read the

operating instructions of

y

our displa

y

device (or A

V

amplifier) for more information.

Please re

f

er to “GLOSSARY” on page 122

f

or the terms used in this owner’s manual

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 8 2013/02/12 21:06:09

9

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingConnections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

Introduction

A

vailable for a disc that is not finalized or DVD+RW

.

HDD DVD

Deletin

g

a title:

You may delete a recorded title.

g

Puttin

g

names on titles

:

You can put

y

our favorite names on titles

.

Setting / clearing chapter marks:

You can set / clear chapter marks on titles

.

Dividing titles

:

Y

ou

ca

n

d

ivi

de

a

t

i

t

l

e

in

to

2

o

r m

o

r

e.

HDD

Deleting a scene of a title:

You can delete a scene from a title as you like.

DVD

Hiding chapters

:

To keep others from playing back some chapters without

p

ermission,

y

ou can hide chapters

.

Setting an index pictures:

You may set a speci

f

ic scene o

f

a recorded title

f

or your

opening Title Menu picture

.

Puttin

g

name on disc:

This feature allows

y

ou to set a specific Name for an

y

r

ecorded disc, that

y

ou ma

y

record

.

E

ditin

g

P

la

y

back

DVD

Recor

d

e

d

DVDs are a

bl

e to p

l

a

y

in ot

h

er DVD P

l

a

y

ers:

Recorded discs can be played back on regular DVD

p

l

ayers, inc

l

u

d

ing computer DVD

d

rives compati

bl

e

w

ith DVD-video playback. Although DVD+R are playable

on other units without

f

inalization in most cases, it

is recommended to finalize in order to stabilize the

per

f

ormance. For DVD-RW/-R, you need to

f

inalize the

recor

d

e

d

iscs to p

l

ay

b

ac

k

on ot

h

er DVD p

l

ayers.

Compatibilit

y

HDD DVD

Progressive scan s

y

stem:

Unlike conventional interlace scannin

g

, the pro

g

ressive

scan s

y

stem provides less flickering and images in higher

resolution than that of traditional television si

g

nals.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface

)

You can enjoy clearer audio/video output when

connecting this unit to a displa

y

device with an HDMI-

compati

bl

e port.

Other

s

Symbols Used in this Owner’s Manual

To speci

f

y

f

or which media type each

f

unction is, we put

t

he following symbols at the beginning of each item to

operate

.

* DVD-RW/-R recor

d

e

d

in VR mo

d

e or non compati

bl

e

recording format are not playable

.

* DVD-RW recor

d

e

d

in the mo

d

e other than +VR is not

recor

d

a

bl

e on t

h

is unit un

l

ess you erase a

ll

contents in

the disc (re

f

er to page 99)

.

* DVD-R recor

d

e

d

in the mo

d

e other than +VR is not

recor

d

a

bl

e on t

h

is unit

.

Symbol

For Recording, Playing Back, and Editing

Description

Description refers to HDD

For Playback only

Description refers to DVD+RW

Description refers to DVD+R

Description refers to audio CD

Description refers to video CD with PBC function

Description refers to video CD without PBC

function

Description refers to DVD-video

If you do not nd any of the symbols listed above under the

function heading, the operation is applicable to all media.

Description refers to DVD-RW

Description refers to DVD-R

Description refers to discs with JPEG les

(KODAK Picture CD les included)

FEATURES

HDD DVD

T

heater surround sound in your home:

W

hen connectin

g

the unit to an amplifier or a decoder

which is compatible with Dolb

y

Digital,

y

ou can

experience the theater surround sound from discs with

surround sound system.

Quick search for what you want to watch:

You can easily find the part you want to watch using the

search functions. You can search for a desired point by

title, chapter or time.

Variable skip:

You can skip forward a certain time, which is specified

in “Playback” menu in advance, with one-touch while

p

layback

.

Variable replay:

You can skip back a certain time, which is specified in

“

P

l

ay

b

ac

k

” menu in a

d

vance, wit

h

one-touc

h

w

h

i

l

e

pl

ay

b

ac

k.

HDD

Chasing playback during recording and simultaneous

playback and recording:

You can play back the already recorded part of the current

r

ecording or another title during recording.

DVD

Playing back JPEG/KODAK Picture CD files

:

You can enjoy JPEG files which are recorded on

DVD+RW/+R

,

DVD-RW/-R and CD-RW/-R

,

and KODA

K

Picture CD files which are recorded on CD-RW/-R.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 9 2013/02/12 21:06:09

10

E

N

EN

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

(

*

)

T

he unit can also be turned on by pressing these buttons

.

1

.

y

STANDBY/ON button

Press to turn on the unit

,

or to turn the unit to the

standby mode. (To completely shut down the unit,

you must unplug the AC power cord)

2. Disc tra

y

Place a Disc after opening the disc tray.

3.

A

OPEN

/

CLOSE button*

Press to Open or Close the disc tray.

4. Displa

y

Refer to “Front Panel Displa

y

” on page 14.

5.

HDD

butto

n

Pr

ess

to

se

l

ect

t

h

e

HDD m

ode.

6.

DVD

butto

n

Pr

ess

to

se

l

ect

t

h

e

DVD m

ode.

7

.

C

S

T

O

P

button

Press to stop Pla

y

back or Recording

.

8.

B

PLAY

button

*

Press to Start or Resume playback.

9

.

I

R

E

CO

RD

button

Press once to start a Recording. Press repeatedly to

start One-Touch Timer Recording

.

10.

C

HANNEL

/

buttons

Press to chan

g

e the Channel up and down.

11. DV-IN jack (L3)

Use to connect the DV output of External device with

a DV ca

b

le

.

12. AUDIO input jacks

(

L

2

)

Use

to

co

nn

ect

Ex

te

rn

a

l

de

vi

ce

wi

t

h

a

n R

C

A

aud

i

o

cab

l

e.

13. VIDEO input jack (L2

)

Use

to

co

nn

ect

Ex

te

rn

a

l

de

vi

ce

wi

t

h

a

n R

C

A vi

deo

cab

l

e.

14. S-VIDEO input jack (

L2

)

Use

to

co

nn

ect

t

h

e

S-

V

ideo out

p

ut of External device

w

i

t

h

a

n

S

-

V

ideo

cab

l

e.

1

5.

Infr

a

r

ed

se

n

so

r win

do

w

Receive signals from

y

our Remote control so that

y

ou

ca

n

co

n

t

r

o

l

t

h

e

u

ni

t

fr

o

m

a

d

i

sta

n

ce.

21 3* 5 6 7 8* 9104

1213 111415

Front Panel

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 10 2013/02/12 21:06:09

11

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingConnections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

Introduction

1. ANTENNA IN jack

Use to connect an Antenna / Cable Box / Satellite

Receiver

f

or RF Pass Through only.

2. VIDEO IN jack (

L

1

)

Use

to

co

nn

ect

Ex

te

rn

a

l

de

vi

ce

wi

t

h

a

n R

C

A vi

deo

ca

b

le

.

3. VIDEO OUT jack

Use to connect a TV monitor, AV receiver or other

d

evice with an RCA vi

d

eo ca

b

le

.

4. HDMI OUT jack

Use an HDMI cable to connect to a displa

y

with an

HDMI compatible port.

5. AC Power Cor

d

• Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to

t

hi

s

u

ni

t.

• Unplug this cord from the AC outlet to completely

shut down the unit.

6. DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT (COAXIAL) jack

Use to connect an AV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder

or other device with a digital audio coaxial input jack

with a digital audio coaxial cable.

7. S-VIDEO OUT jack

Use to connect the S-Video input o

f

a TV monitor, A

V

receiver or other

d

evice with an S-Vi

d

eo ca

b

le

.

8. COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jack

s

Use to connect a TV monitor with component video

inputs wit

h

a component vi

d

eo ca

bl

e.

9. AUDIO OUT jack

s

Use to connect a TV monitor, AV Receiver or other

devices with a set of RCA audio cables

.

10. S-VIDEO IN jack (L1

)

Use to connect an External device, by an S-Video

ca

b

le

.

11. AUDIO IN jacks (

L

1

)

Use to connect an External device with a set o

f

RCA

au

d

io ca

b

les

.

12. ANTENNA OUT jac

k

Use to connect an RF coaxial cable to pass the signal

f

rom the ANTENNA IN to your TV.

Note

•

Do not touch the inner pins o

f

the jacks on the rear

p

ane

l

. E

l

ectrostatic

d

isc

h

arge may cause permanent

d

amage to the unit

.

•

T

h

is unit

d

oes not

h

ave t

h

e RF mo

d

u

l

ator.

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

ANTENNA

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

21

9

3 5

4

810 712 11 6

AC plug

Rear Panel

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 11 2013/02/12 21:06:09

12

E

N

EN

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

Usin

g

a Remote Contro

l

Keep in mind the

f

ollowing when using the remote

co

n

t

r

ol:

• M

a

k

e

su

r

e

t

h

at

t

h

e

r

e

a

r

e

n

o

obstac

l

es

bet

w

ee

n

t

h

e

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l

a

n

d

t

h

e

infr

a

r

ed

se

n

so

r win

do

w

o

n

t

h

e

u

ni

t.

• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong

sunli

g

ht or fluorescent li

g

ht is shinin

g

on the infrared

s

ensor window of the unit.

• Remote controls for different devices can interfere

with each other. Avoid usin

g

remote controls for other

d

evices located close to the unit.

• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the

operatin

g

ran

g

e of the remote control.

• The maximum operable ran

g

es from the unit are as

follows

.

-Line of si

g

ht

:

approx. 23 feet (7m)

-Ei

t

h

e

r

s

i

de

o

f

t

h

e

ce

n

te

r

:

approx. 16 feet (5m) within 30

°

-A

bo

v

e:

a

pp

rox. 16 feet (5m) within 15°

-B

e

l

o

w

:

approx. 10 feet (3m) within 30°

Insta

ll

t

h

e 2 AA (1.5 V)

b

atteries

b

y matc

h

ing t

h

e sym

b

o

l

s

as

d

isp

l

aye

d

in t

h

e Remote Contro

l.

N

ote

In

co

rr

ect

use

o

f

batte

ri

es

ca

n r

esu

l

t

in h

a

z

a

r

ds

suc

h

as

l

eaka

g

e and burstin

g

. Please observe the followin

g:

•

Lithium or ni-cad and ni-mh rechargeable batteries

are not recommended to use for remote control

.

•

Do not mix different t

y

pes of batteries such as

alkaline and standard

(

carbon-zinc

).

•

Do not mix new and old batteries to

g

ether.

•

Do not use different kinds of batteries together.

Although they may look similar, different batteries

may have di

ff

erent voltages

.

•

Make sure that the + and - ends of each batter

y

match the indications in the batter

y

compartment

.

•

Remove batteries

f

rom battery compartment that is

not going to be used for a month or more.

•

When disposing o

f

used batteries, please comply

with governmental regulations or environmental

public instruction’s rules that apply in your country

or area.

•

Do not rechar

g

e, short-circuit, heat, burn or

d

i

sasse

m

b

l

e

batte

ri

es.

Insta

ll

in

g

t

h

e Batteries in t

h

e Remote Contro

l

16feet (5m)

30˚30˚

16feet (5m) 23feet (7m)

21

2

4

22

23

25

27

28

29

33

34

24

20

30

31

32

26

7

8

5

6

10

11

16

12

17

14

9

13*

15

118

19*

3

1

Open the cover

.

1

2

Insert

b

atteries

.

M

ake

su

r

e

to

m

atch

+

a

n

d

-

o

n

the

batte

ri

es

to

the marks indicated in the battery compartment

.

3

C

l

ose t

h

e cover

.

1

2

Remote Control

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 12 2013/02/12 21:06:10

13

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingConnections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

Introduction

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

(

*

) T

h

e unit can a

l

so

b

e turne

d

on

b

y pressing t

h

ese

b

uttons

.

1. DTV/TV

b

utto

n

• Press to switc

h

b

etween Digita

l

TV (DTV) mo

d

e an

d

Analog TV (TV) mode.

2.

S

TANDBY

/O

N

yy

b

utto

n

• Press to turn On the unit, or to turn the unit to the

Standby mode. (To completely shut down the unit,

y

ou must unplug the AC power cord)

3. AUDIO butto

n

• Press to switch the Audio lan

g

ua

g

e for di

g

ital TV

.

• Press to display the Audio menu during playback

.

4. Number/Character buttons

• Press to select Channel numbers.

• Press to select a title/chapter/track/file on display.

• Press to enter values for the settings in the Main

m

enu.

• Press to enter Title names

.

5. Decimal ( • ) button

Digital mode:

• Press to confirm the major / minor channel selection

made by [the Number buttons

]

.

6. DISPLAY

b

utto

n

• Press to turn the Display Menu on or off.

7. HDD

b

utto

n

• Press to select the HDD mo

d

e

.

8.

DI

SC

MEN

U

button

• Press to display the Disc Menu

.

9.

C

ursor

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

b

utton

s

• Press to select items or settings.

10. MENU

b

utton

• Press to display the Main Menu.

• During playback, press and hold

f

or more than 3

seconds to switch the Progressive Scanning mode

to the Interlace mo

d

e

.

1

1. CHANNEL / buttons

• Press to change the Channel Up and Down.

12. REW

E

b

utton

• During playback, press to Fast Reverse the playback.

• When playback is in pause, press to Slow Reverse

the playback

.

13. PLAY

B

button*

• Press to start Playback or Resume playback.

14.

PR

EV

H

b

utton

• During playback, press to return to the Beginning o

f

the current chapter, track or

f

ile.

• W

h

en p

l

ay

b

ac

k

is in Pause, press repeate

dl

y to

Reverse the playback step by step

.

15. STOP

C

b

utto

n

• Press to stop P

l

ay

b

ac

k

or Recor

d

ing.

• Press to exit

f

rom the Title list

.

1

6. PAU

S

EF

b

utto

n

• Press to pause P

l

ay

b

ac

k

or Recor

d

ing.

17. REC

b

utton

• Press once to start a Recor

d

ing

.

• Press repeate

dl

y to start t

h

e One-Touc

h

Timer

Recording

.

18. SOURCE

b

utton

• Press to se

l

ect t

h

e appropriate Input

.

19. OPEN/CLOSE

A

b

utton*

• Press to Open or C

l

ose t

h

e Disc tray

.

20. REPEAT button

• Press to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e Repeat menu.

21. HDMI butto

n

• Press to set the HDMI Display mode-Only when

usin

g

the HDMI connection

.

22. CLEAR butto

n

• Press to clear the information once entered

,

to clear

the marker settin

g

s, or to cancel the pro

g

rammin

g

f

or CD, etc.

23. TIMER PROG. butto

n

• Press to display the Timer Programming list.

24. DVD button

• Press to se

l

ect t

h

e DVD mo

d

e

.

25. TITLE butto

n

• Press to displa

y

the Title list.

2

6.

O

K

button

• Pr

ess

to

Co

n

f

irm

o

r

Se

l

ect

M

e

n

u

i

te

m

s.

27. RETUR

N

b

utton

• Press to return to the previously displayed menu

s

creen.

28.

S

KIP

b

utton

• Skips by the amount of Time Set in Advance.

29. REPLAY button

• Replays by the amount of Time Set in Advance

.

30. FFW

D

b

utto

n

•

During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press to Fast Forwar

d

t

h

e p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

• W

h

en p

l

ay

b

ac

k

is in pause, press to S

l

ow Forwar

d

the playback.

3

1

.

NEXT G butto

n

• During playback, press to Skip to the next chapter,

t

r

ac

k

o

r fil

e.

• When playback is in pause, press repeatedly to

Forward the playback step by step.

3

2

.

RAPID PLAY

button

• During playback, press to Play Back in a slightly

Slower-0.8x/Faster-1.3x/Normal mode while

Keeping the Sound output.

33. DUBBING

b

utto

n

• During playback, press to start Dubbing right away.

• In stop mode, press to display “Dubbing” menu.

34. REC MODE

b

utton

• Press repeate

dl

y to switc

h

t

h

e Recor

d

ing mo

d

e.

N

ot

e

• If using a universal remote, please check for any

a

dditional remote code or contact the manufacturer

f

or additional assistances

.

• Cannot guarantee about 3rd part

y

’s remote controls.

Please contact the remote manufacturer if

y

ou have

an

y

problem with it

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 13 2013/02/12 21:06:10

14

E

N

EN

A

ppears when the PBC function

i

s activated. (Video CD playback

o

nly. Refer to page 68.)

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

PM

DTV BS CS DR CD

VCR

HDDDB

DVD

1

5

3

4

2

1.

PM

: Appears in the afternoon

with the clock display.

(Nothing appears in the

mornin

g

.

)

2.

DT

V

: Appears when the channel

i

s

in DTV m

ode.

3. Title / track / file and cha

p

ter mar

k

: Appears when indicatin

g

a

title / track / file number.

: Appears when indicatin

g

a

cha

p

ter number

.

4

. Current status of the unit

: Appears when playback is

paused.

: Appears when playing back

an HDD or disc.

:

Appears when the timer

programming or OTR has

b

een set and is proceeding

.

E

ntire Display

:

Fl

as

h

es

wh

e

n

t

im

e

r

programming was not executed

because

o

f

so

m

e

rr

o

r

.

:

Appears during recording

p

rocess

.

E

ntire Displa

y:

Flashes when a recording

p

auses.

: Appears when a disc is in

t

hi

s

u

ni

t.

DB

: Appears during dubbing.

HDD

: Appears when the unit is in

HDD mo

d

e

.

DVD

: Appears w

h

en t

h

e unit is in

DVD mo

d

e

.

5. Displays the followin

g

• Elapsed playback time

• Current title / chapter / track /file

numbe

r

• Recording time / remaining time

•

C

l

oc

k

•

C

h

a

nn

e

l n

u

m

be

r

• Remaining time for one-touch

timer recordin

g

• Selected HDMI out

p

u

t

A

ppears when data is bein

g

recorded on a disc.

A

ppears when a disc is loaded

o

n the disc tray.

A

ppears when the disc tra

y

is

c

losin

g.

A

ppears when the disc tray is

o

pening

.

Displa

y

Message

Appears w

h

en HDMI output

(720p) is se

l

ecte

d

.

A

pp

ears when HDMI out

p

ut

(1080p) is selected.

Appears when HDMI output

(480p) is selected

.

Appears when HDMI output

(

1080i

)

is selected.

Front Panel Display

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 14 2013/02/12 21:06:10

15

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

CONNECTION

Read this first

:

1

)

Disconnect the AC

p

ower cords of the devices from the AC outlet

.

2

)

M

a

k

e

t

h

e

co

nn

ect

i

o

n

as

ill

ust

r

ated

be

l

o

w

.

3

)

A

f

ter making all the connections, connect the AC power cords o

f

the devices

.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

ANTENNA

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

ANTENNA

This connection is for

TV pass through only

VHF / UHF

antenna

cable TV

company

RF coaxial

cable

or

RF coaxial

cable

ANT. IN

rear of this unit

Choose one of the following connections

d

epen

d

ing on t

h

e jac

k

s on your TV.

N

ote

• For your safety and to avoid damage to the device, please unplug the RF coaxial cable from the ANTENNA IN jack before

moving the unit.

• I

f

you use an antenna to receive analog TV, it should also work

f

or DTV reception. Outdoor or attic antennas will be

more e

ff

ective than set-top versions

.

• ANTENNA OUT jack is for tuner pass through onl

y

. HDD / DVD pla

y

back through the RF is not possible.

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RF coaxial cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

If Your TV hasRefer to

If you are using

cable / satellite box

Standard

Quality

Higher

Quality

If your device has

only an ANT. IN jack

page

17

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

LR

VIDEO IN

page

20

page

19

page

17

page

16

page

16

S-VIDEO IN

HDMI IN

ANT. IN

• Connect this unit directly to the TV. I

f

the RCA audio/video cables are connected to a VCR, pictures may be

distorted due to the copy protection system

.

•

W

hen “Progressive Scan” is set to “ON”, no video signal will be output from the VIDEO OUT or S-VIDEO OUT jack.

Antenna Connection (Required)

Overview

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 15 2013/02/12 21:06:10

1

6

E

N

EN

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RF coaxial cable x 1

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

ANTENNA

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

ANTENNA

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

RCA video cable

RCA audio cable

rear of this unit

ANT. IN

VHF / UHF

antenna

cable TV

company

RF coaxial

cable

or

This connection is for

TV pass through only

RF coaxial

cable

AUDIO IN

L

R

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

ANTENNA

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

S-VIDEO

OUT

ANTENNA

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

rear of this unit

RCA audio cable

S-Video cable

VHF / UHF

antenna

cable TV

company

or

ANT. IN This connection is for

TV pass through only

RF coaxial

cable RF coaxial

cable

S-VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

L

R

S-VIDEO

OUT

CONNECTION

Connecting to a TV Using Audio / Video jacks

Connecting to a TV Using the S-Video Out jack

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 16 2013/02/12 21:06:11

17

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RF coaxial cable x 1

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

S-VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

L

R

Y

VIDEO

OUT

ANTENNA

rear of this unit

VHF / UHF

antenna

cable TV

company

or

RF coaxial

cable

RF coaxial

cable

ANT. IN This connection is for

TV pass through only

AUDIO OUT

L

R

Y

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUTPUT

RCA audio cable

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Y

PB

/CB

PR

/CR

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

AUDIO IN

L

R

RCA component

video cable

VIDEO

OUT

CONNECTION

Connecting to a TV Using Component Video Out jacks

• HDMI outputs the video / audio signals without converting to analog signals.

• No audio connection is re

q

uired

.

• High Speed HDMI cable (also known as HDMI category 2 cable) is recommended

f

or better compatibility.

• Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo (a certi

f

ied HDMI cable)

f

or this connection

.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

S-VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

L

R

Y

VIDEO

OUT

ANTENNA

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

rear of this unit

VHF / UHF

antenna

cable TV

company

or

ANT. IN

This connection is for

TV pass through only

RF coaxial

cable

RF coaxial

cable

Do not tilt the connector when inserting it into the HDMI jack, and make sure the

shapes of the jack and the connector are matched.

HDMI cable

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RF coaxial cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI Compatible Port

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 17 2013/02/12 21:06:12

18

E

N

EN

CONNECTION

HDMI Mode and Actual Output Si

g

nals

P

ress

[

HDMI

]

to select the HDMI output mode. The output mode changes as

f

ollows every time

[

HDMI

]

is presse

d

.

HDMI connection makes this unit automatically output the most suitable resolution for your TV.

Front Panel Displa

y

V

ideo Output Signal

480 Progress

i

v

e

Press

[

HDMI

]

720 Progressiv

e

Press

[

HDMI

]

1080 interlace

d

Press

[

HDMI

]

1080 Progressiv

e

Press [HDMI]

• The HDMI mode that is not supported by the display device will be skipped.

*HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interfac

e

Copyright protection syste

m

To pla

y

back the digital video images of a DVD via an HDMI connection, it is necessar

y

that both the pla

y

er and the displa

y

device (or an AV amplifier) support a cop

y

right protection s

y

stem called HDCP (high-bandwidth digital content protection

s

y

stem). HDCP is a cop

y

protection technolog

y

that comprises data encr

y

ption and authentication of the connected A

V

device. This unit supports HDCP. Please read the operating instructions of

y

our displa

y

device (or AV amplifier) for more

inf

o

rm

at

i

o

n

.

Note

• Some devices with an HDMI input may not operate properly with this unit

.

• When using an HDCP-incompatible displa

y

device, the image will not be viewed properl

y.

• Amon

g

the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector; this unit can be controlled

b

y

another device via the HDMI connector

.

• The audio signals

f

rom the HDMI connector (including the sampling

f

requency, the number o

f

channels and bit length) may be

limited by the device that is connected

.

• Among the monitors that support HDMI, some do not support audio output (

f

or example, projectors). In connections with device

such as this unit, audio signals are not output

f

rom the HDMI output connector

.

• When this unit’s HDMI connector is connected to a DVI-D compatible monitor (HDCP compatible) with an HDMI-DVI converter cable,

the signals are output in digital RGB

.

• When a power failure occurs, or when you unplug the unit, some problems with the HDMI setting might occur. Please check and set

t

h

e HDMI setting again.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 18 2013/02/12 21:06:13

19

E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

CONNECTION

• Required cables and connectin

g

methods differ dependin

g

on the cable/satellite box.

F

or more information, please contact

y

our cable/satellite provider

.

• Instead of using VIDEO OUT jack on this unit,

y

ou can also use S-VIDEO OUT jack, COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT

j

ack or HDMI OUT jack

f

or connecting to your TV.

With this setup

:

• You can record an

y

unscrambled non-cop

y

protected program b

y

selecting the channel on the cable/satellite box.

B

e sure that the cable

/

satellite box is turned on

.

• You cannot record one channel while watching another channel

.

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RF coaxial cable x 1

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

R

L

IN

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

R

L

ANT. INANT.OUT

LR

VIDEO OUTAUDIO OUT

rear of this unit

cable/satellite box

RCA video cable

RCA audio cable

RCA audio

cable

RCA video cable

satellite

dish

ANT. IN

cable TV

company

RF coaxial cable

or

RF coaxial

cable

AUDIO IN

L

R

VIDEO IN

This connection is for

TV pass through only

RF coaxial

cable

ANTENNA

Connecting to a Cable / Satellite Box

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 19 2013/02/12 21:06:13

2

0

E

N

EN

CONNECTION

Not

e

• RF mo

d

u

l

ator is not supp

l

ie

d

wit

h

t

h

is unit. You nee

d

to purc

h

ase it at your

l

oca

l

store.

• The qualit

y

of picture ma

y

become poor if this unit is connected to an RF modulator

.

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RF coaxial cable x 1

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

rear of your RF modulator

(not supplied)

AUDIO IN TO TVANT. IN

LR

CHANNEL

43

VIDEO IN

ANT. IN

Set channel 3 or 4

rear of this unit

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Set channel 3 or 4

ANTENNA

RF coaxial cable RF coaxial cable

VHF / UHF

antenna

RF coaxial

cable

cable TV

company

or RCA video

cable

RCA audio cable

If your TV only has an Antenna input

(no A/V inputs), you will need a

RF modulator (NOT INCLUDED) to

connect this player.

RF modulator

AUDIO IN

RL

VIDEO IN

CHANNEL

43

TO TV

TV

ANT. IN

No Antenna (RF) Output!

No A/V

Inputs

Connecting to a TV without Audio / Video jacks

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 20 2013/02/12 21:06:14

2

1E

N

EN

Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Function Setup Others Español

CONNECTION

N

ot

e

• The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital multi channel surround

f

ormat cannot be recorded as digital sound

b

y an MD or DAT

d

ec

k

.

• B

y

connecting this unit to a Dolb

y

Digital decoder,

y

ou can enjo

y

high-qualit

y

Dolb

y

Digital multi channel

surround sound as in movie theaters.

• Playing back a DVD using incorrect digital audio settings may generate noise distortion and also damage speakers

.

Supplied cables used in these connections are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

HDMI Au

d

io Connection

To set up “HDMI Audio” refer to pa

g

es 104 and 114.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

R

L

IN

COAXIAL

rear of this unit

Dolby Digital decoder

digital audio

coaxial cable

digital audio

coaxial input jack

COAXIAL

ANTENNA

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

R

L

IN

COAXIAL

HDMI OUT

AV receiver / amplier with an HDMI input jack

HDMI IN

HDMI cable

rear of this unit

ANTENNA

Dolby DigitalPCM

Stream

PCM

Stream

2 channel PCM

Dolby Digital

2 channel PCM

Dolby Digital

LPCM2 channel PCM

Audio format (disc) HDMI Digital Output

Dolby Digital

Setting of this unit

Actual Output

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

2 Channel Analog Audio Connection

stereo system

analog audio

input jacks

RCA audio cable

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

L

R

AUDIO IN

LR

rear of this unit

ANTENNA

To set up “Dolby Digital” refer to pages 102 and 107.

Cables not included.

Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store.

Digital Audio Connection

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 21 2013/02/12 21:06:14

22

E

N

EN

BEFORE YOU START

Finding the Viewing Channel on your TV

A

f

ter you have completed all the connections, you must

f

ind the viewing channel (external input channel) on your TV.

1

After

y

ou have made all the

necessar

y

connections, press

[STANDBY/ON

yy

] to turn on the unit.

2

Turn on your TV.

• If connected to your VCR make sure it is

switched Off or in Standby mode before

proceeding

.

3

Locate the Video/In

p

ut button on the

TV’

s

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l

t

h

at

access

t

h

e

external In

p

ut Channel. Press until

you see the “Initial Setup” menu on

t

h

e

sc

r

ee

n

.

Initial Setup

Language

English

Français

Español

You ma

y

tr

y

to access the Video/Input mode b

y

:

-Locate the input button on the Front/Top/Side

of the TV

-Locate the Input Mode in the TV’s Setup Menu.

If

y

ou cannot locate the Video/Input button on

the TV’s remote control, refer to the TV’s user

Manual or “Input Mode Names for Common TV

Brands (Example)”.

I

f

more than 10 minutes has passed, you may

see the MAGNAVOX screen saver

.

4

Proceed to ste

p

2 in “INITIAL

SETTING” on pa

g

e 28.

N

ote

• Video input selection varies for different brand’s

models o

f

TVs

.

• Consult your TV manu

f

acturer i

f

none o

f

the above is

successful

.

Input Mode Names for Common TV Brands (Example)

Admira

l

AU

X

P

anasonic TV/VIDEO

C

urtis

Mathi

s

LINE1, LINE2,

00, 90, 91, 92, 93 RCA INPUT, TV/VCR,

00, 90, 91, 92, 9

3

G

EINPUT, TV/VCR,

00

,

90

,

91

,

92

,

93

S

amsun

g

TV

/

VIDE

O

Hitach

i

INPUT, AUX Sanyo VIDE

O

J

V

C

VIDEO

,

VIDEO 1

,

VIDEO 2

,

VIDEO 3 Shar

p

00

K

e

nw

ood

A

UX

Sony VIDEO1, VIDEO2,

VIDE

O

3

LXI-

S

erie

s

00

Toshiba TV

/

GAME

Ma

g

navox

A

U

X

C

HANNE

L

Z

e

ni

t

h

00

WARNING

:

•

P

lease finish the Initial Setup before attemptin

g

to

u

se the device. The Device ma

y

not function

c

orrectl

y

without an Initial Setup

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 22 2013/02/12 21:06:15

23

E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

T

his unit uses the following on-screen displays and menus to guide you to the easy operations.

T

he on-screen displays give you the in

f

ormation on the loaded disc or the disc/

f

ile in playback, or the HDMI status, etc.

The menus allow you to change the various kinds of settings for playing back, recording, or editing to suit your preference.

BEFORE YOU START

DTV

KABC

11.1

A quarter-century ago, which may now qualify

as the good old days of newspapering,

run-of-paper sales accounted for 80 percent

of the industry's advertising revenues.

A Day of Memories

Multilingual Caption

Signal

Bad Good

TV-PG

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

9

1.

Program Tit

l

e(1

l

ine

d

isp

l

aye

d)

2

. Audio In

f

ormation (Indicates that the program being

b

roadcasted is available in multi-languages.

)

3.

Closed Caption (Indicates that the program being

b

roa

d

caste

d

is avai

l

a

bl

e wit

h

c

l

ose

d

captioning.

)

4.

Program Guide (Max. 4 lines displayed)

5

. Signal strength (Indicates the signal strength of the

c

urrent channel.

)

6.

P

ro

g

ram

R

atin

g

7

. Aspect Ratio of the selected progra

m

8

. Channel number

9

. Broadcast station

N

ot

e

•

When the program guide is displayed in more than 4

lines

,

use [

K

/

L

]

to

sc

r

o

ll

.

•

No description is displa

y

ed when the program guide

d

ata is not provided

.

•

In some cases, DTV closed caption function of the

unit may not work even when the closed caption

icon is shown. In such case, check the closed caption

setting o

f

your TV (Only i

f

the unit is connected to a

T

V wit

h

t

h

e RCA Vi

10:42AM

10:10AM

7:10AM

CH 10

7

65

4

3

4

2

4

1

.

Starting time of the autostart recording

2.

Status of the time autostart recording

Live : Indicates when watching live T

V

B

: In

d

icates w

h

en p

l

aying

b

ac

k

t

h

e autostart recor

d

ing.

3.

T

h

e time t

h

at t

h

e picture current

l

y

d

isp

l

aye

d

on t

h

e

sc

r

ee

n i

s

b

r

oadcasted

4

. Current time

5.

The progress of the autostart recordin

g

6.

Current point of the playback of the autostart recording

7. Elapsed time o

f

the playback o

f

the autostart

recording / total time of the autostart recording

T

he on-screen display changes in the following order

a

s you press [DISPLAY]

.

O

FF

DTV Program Guid

e

(only in DTV mode)

Autostart Recordin

g

Informatio

n

(onl

y

in HDD mode when no titles are pla

y

ing back

)

HDD / DVD Information/Men

u

Title Name Information

(only when DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R, or HDD

is in p

l

ay

b

ac

k)

o

r

Fil

e

N

a

m

e

Inf

o

rm

at

i

o

n

(

only when a disc with JPEG/KODAK Picture CD

f

iles

is in playback

)

HDMI In

f

ormatio

n

(only

f

or the images output through the HDMI output)

Guide to On-Screen Display / Menu

DTV Program Guide

Autostart Recording Information

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 23 2013/02/12 21:06:15

24

E

N

EN

CH 10

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

Video

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

DVD SP(2Hr) 1h53m

6

5

7

1 2

43

512

Displayed items may vary depending on the disc you

i

nsert

.

1.Indicates the file type or a disc type and format mode.

(DVD mode only)

2.Indicates a channel number or selected external input

c

h

a

nn

e

l

.

3

.Indicates the component in use, a recording mode and

possible recordin

g

time left

.

T

he on-screen indication of the possible recordin

g

time

l

eft on HDD / DVD ma

y

differ from the actual recordable

time as this unit emplo

y

s the variable bit rate encoding

s

y

stem which varies the recording (storage) amount of

data in conformit

y

with the amount of information on

t

h

e

vi

deo.

4

.

Indicates an o

p

eration status

.

5

.Icons Use

d

:

f

or title / chapter search, track search and time

search. (Re

f

er to pages 79-80)

Audi

o

: to switch audio soundtracks. (Refer to page 81.)

Subt

i

tle

: to switch subtitles. (Refer to page 81.

)

Angle: to switch camera angles. (Refer to page 82.)

R

epeat: to repeat playback. (Refer to page 77.)

Marker: to add markers to a title. (Refer to page 76.)

Noise Re

d

uction: to re

d

uce noise in t

h

e p

l

ay

b

ac

k

picture. (Re

f

er to page 82.)

: to zoom screen. (Refer to pa

g

e 76.)

6.

Indicates the current title number

/

total number o

f

titles, the current cha

p

ter number/total number of

chapters, and time lapse of the current title pla

y

back

/

tota

l

du

r

at

i

o

n

o

f

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e.

7

.Indicates the currently active unit.

: HDD

: DVD

BEFORE YOU START

Title Name

My Title

File Name

My File

Video Info. : 480p / YCbCr

Audio Info. : Bitstream

21

3

4

3

**

*

1

.

Indicates the resolution o

f

the HDMI output image

.

2

.Indicates the HDMI video

f

ormat.

3.

In

d

i

cates

t

h

e

HDMI

aud

i

o

f

o

rm

at.

4. Indicates current disc status.

*

“- - -” will be displayed, when it does not have any

in

f

ormation

.

HDD / DVD In

f

ormation / Menu Title / File Name In

f

ormation

HDMI Inf

o

rm

at

i

o

n

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 24 2013/02/12 21:06:16

2

5E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

BEFORE YOU START

Press

[

MENU

]

to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e main menu. T

h

en u

se

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a menu an

d

press

[

OK

]

to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e

menu. These menus provides entries to all main settings.

Menu

Timer Programming

Title List

Disc Edit

HDD Menu

General Setting

Dubbing

DISC Playback Mode

1

2

3

4

5

4

6

4

7

1. Genera

l

Settin

g:

To

g

o to

g

enera

l

settin

g

menu.

2. Timer Programming

:

To pro

g

ram a timer recor

d

in

g

.

3. Tit

l

e List:

To ca

ll

up t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist.

4. Disc E

d

it:

To set up the DVD setting.

5. H

DD

Menu

:

T

o set up the HDD settin

g.

6. Dubbing

:

•

To dub the content of the HDD to DVD or vice versa

.

•

“Dubbing” is available only when a recordable disc is

l

oa

d

e

d.

7. DISC Playback Mode:

To set up t

h

e

d

isc p

l

ay

b

ac

k

setting.

• “DISC Playback Mode” is available only when, an audio

CD, a video CD and a disc with JPEG / KODAK Picture

CD

f

iles is inserted into the unit

.

General Setting

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

Channel

HDMI

Parental Lock

Disc Audio

Disc Menu Language

Audio Language

Subtitle Language

Angle Icon

Still Mode

Variable Skip / Replay

1

2

3

4

5

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1. Playback

:

To set up the unit to play back discs as you pre

f

er.

2. Disp

l

ay

:

To set up the screen as you pre

f

er.

3

. Vi

d

eo

:

To set up the video setting. (Re

f

er to page 113

f

or TV

Aspect setting.

)

4. Recor

d

ing

:

To set up the unit to record to discs as you pre

f

er

.

5. C

l

oc

k:

To set up the clock o

f

the unit as you need.

6. C

h

anne

l:

To adjust the channel setting on the unit as you pre

f

er

.

7. H

D

MI

:

To set up t

h

e HDMI connection setting

.

Main Menu

Genera

l

Setting Men

u

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 25 2013/02/12 21:06:16

26

E

N

EN

BEFORE YOU START

1

.

E

d

i

t

Di

sc

N

a

m

e:

Allows

y

ou to rename the disc.

2.

Er

ase

Di

sc:

(

DVD+RW

/

D

V

D

-RW only)

Allows

y

ou to erase all contents in the disc and format it

.

3. Make Edits Compatible:

(

DVD+RW only)

Allows you to memorize the editing status on the

disc if you have added or deleted chapters, or made

c

hapters hidden on this unit, and to show the effects

when playing back on the other unit.

Finalize:

(

DVD+R/DVD-RW/-

R

only

)

Allows you to finalize a disc containing recorded titles

.

4. Disc Protect :

Allows you to protect a disc from accidental editing or

recording

.

5

. Random Play:

Allows you to activate the random playback feature

.

6. Program Play: (audio CD/video CD only)

Allows you to activate the program playback

f

eature

.

7

. PBC (Video CD only):

Allows

y

ou to select images or information on the

menu screen by activating PBC (playback control)

f

unction

.

8. Sli

d

e Show: (JPEG/KODAK Picture CD files only

)

Allows

y

ou to select the displa

y

time o

f

the slide show

mo

d

e

.

9. Delete All Unprotected Titles

:

Allows you to delete all unprotected titles in the HDD

t

i

t

l

e

li

st.

10. Delete All Titles

:

Allows you to delete all titles, including the protected

titles

,

in the HDD title list

.

11

.

HDD DVD

:

Allows you to dub

f

rom HDD to DVD.

12

.

DVD HDD

:

Allows

y

ou to dub from DVD to HDD.

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Make Edits Compatible

Disc Protect OFF ON

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

<Disc E

d

it menu (DVD+RW)

>

DISC Playback Mode

Random Play

Program Play

PBC (Video CD only)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

<DISC P

l

ay

b

ac

k

Mo

d

e menu (au

d

io CD/VCD)

>

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

1

2

3

1

3

4

<Disc Edit menu (DVD+R/DVD-

R

)

>

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

<Disc E

d

it menu (DVD-RW)

>

Delete All Unprotected Titles

Delete All Titles

HDD Menu

1

2

9

10

<

H

DD

Men

u

>

HDD DVD

DVD HDD

Dubbing

1

2

11

12

<

Du

bb

ing men

u

>

DISC Playback Mode

Photo

Random Play

Slide Show

2

5

2

8

<

DISC Pla

y

back Mode menu (JPEG/KODAK Picture CD

)

>

N

ot

e

• Disc edit is available for a disc which is not finalized

o

r DVD+RW

.

Disc Edit / HDD Menu / Dubbing / DISC Playback Mode

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 26 2013/02/12 21:06:16

2

7E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

HDD button

DVD button

HDD button DVD button

BEFORE YOU START

1

)

Press [OPEN/CLOSE

A

] to open the disc tra

y

.

2) Place the disc on the disc tray with its label side facing up.

Align the disc to

the disc tray guide.

3) Press [OPEN/CLOSE

A

] to close the disc tra

y

.

I

t may take a while to load the disc

data after the disc tra

y

closes

.

To eject t

h

e

d

isc

:

P

ress

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to open the disc tray, then remove the disc be

f

ore turning the unit to the standby mode.

• When inserting a brand-new DVD+RW/DVD-RW, the unit automaticall

y

starts to format

.

• If titles have been recorded on the disc, the title list is displayed. Press [STOP

C

]

to exit the title list

.

HDD mode

P

r

ess

[

HDD

]

to

act

iv

ate

t

h

e

HDD m

ode.

DVD mode

P

r

ess

[

DVD

]

to

act

iv

ate

t

h

e

DVD m

ode.

Switching HDD / DVD Mode

How to Insert a Disc

W

ARNIN

G:

• Please finish the Initial Setup before attempting to use the device. The Device ma

y

not function correctl

y

without

an Initial Setu

p

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 27 2013/02/12 21:06:16

2

8

E

N

EN

INITIAL SETTING

You need to

f

ollow these steps when you turn on this unit

f

or the

f

irst time

.

1

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e proce

d

ure in “Fin

d

ing t

h

e

Viewing Channel on Your TV” on

page 22 to

d

isp

l

ay “Initia

l

Setup”

menu.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select your desired

language, then press [OK].

Initial Setup

Language

English

Français

Español

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the type o

f

broadcasting signal, then press [OK].

Initial Setup

Auto Preset will scan all terrestrial channels.

This may take a while to complete.

Channel Preset

Make sure the antenna is

connected to “ANTENNA IN” jack.

Antenna

Cable (Analog)

Cable (Analog / Digital)

The unit will start getting channels available in

your area.

Antenna

:

(When usin

g

an Antenna

)

The channels broadcasted in Analog TV and

Digital TV are automaticall

y

scanned and

memorized. Onl

y

the receivable channels in the

a

r

ea

will

be

m

e

m

o

riz

ed.

Ca

bl

e (Ana

l

og)

:

(When using basic cable)

The channels broadcasted in Analog Cable TV

are automatically scanned and memorized

.

Cable (Analog / Digital):

(When using basic cable)

The channels broadcasted in Analo

g

Cable TV

and Digital Cable TV are automatically scanned

and memorized

.

Auto Presetting Now

CH 1

4

If a PBS (public broadcastin

g

station) is available

in your area, clock setting may automatically be

performed and the correct clock will be displa

y

ed

followin

g

the channel preset procedure.

Initial setting is then complete.

P

ress

[

RETURN

]

to exit

.

If a PBS (public broadcastin

g

station) is not

available in your area, press

[

OK]. Then

p

roceed

to step 5 in “Manual Clock Settin

g

” on pa

g

e 34.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 28 2013/02/12 21:06:16

29

E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

CHANNEL SETTING

Auto Channel Scan

I

f

you have changed antenna connection, we recommend that you program available channels in your area with the

followin

g

procedures

.

1

Press [MENU] and use [

K

/

L

]

to select

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

“Genera

l

Setting” menu wi

ll

appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Channel”, then

press [OK].

“Channel” menu will appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Auto C

h

anne

l

Preset”, t

h

en press [OK].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the type o

f

broadcasting signal, then press [OK].

Auto Channel Preset

Antenna

Cable (Analog)

Cable (Analog / Digital)

The unit will start getting channels available in

your area.

• W

h

en using Antenna, Ca

bl

e Box, or Sate

ll

ite

Receiver wit

h

t

h

e RF Coaxia

l

ca

bl

e, you wou

ld

scan wit

h

t

h

e “Antenna”

.

• When connected to Cable TV

,

select “Cable

(Analog)” or “Cable (Analog / Digital)”.

To cancel the auto channel preset durin

g

scanning

:

P

ress

[

RETURN

]

to go the previous screen o

r

[

MENU

]

to

ca

n

ce

l

.

5

W

h

en scanning is over, press [MENU]

to exit

.

To cycle through only the memorized channels, use

[

CHANNEL

/

]

.

To select a channel directl

y

(including the ones not

memorized)

,

use

[

the Number buttons

]

a

n

d

[

•

]

(

for

di

g

ital TV channels)

.

N

ote

• I

f

Auto Scan is cancelled during the scanning, some

channels will not be programmed

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 29 2013/02/12 21:06:16

30

E

N

EN

1

Press

[

DTV/TV

]

to select the mode

(DTV or TV) to/from which you want

to add/delete channels

.

2

Press [MENU] an

d

use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect

“Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press [OK].

“General Settin

g

” menu will appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Channel”, then

press [OK]

.

“Channel” menu will appear

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Manual Channel

Preset”, then

p

ress [OK].

Auto Channel Preset

Manual Channel Preset

TV Audio Select

• I

f

you are adding or deleting Analog TV/Cable

channels, go to ANAL

OG

to

co

n

t

in

ue.

• I

f

you are adding or deleting Digital TV/Cable

c

h

anne

l

s, go to DI

G

ITA

L

to cont

i

nue

.

CHANNEL SETTING

T

his feature allows you to manually Add or Delete Channels for any adjustments to your Channel Lineup

.

M

a

k

e

su

r

e:

• You perform the “Auto Channel Scan” before addin

g

or deletin

g

the channels

.

Adding / Deleting Channels

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 30 2013/02/12 21:06:17

3

1E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

ANAL

O

G

5

Select the channel num

b

er to a

dd

or

d

e

l

ete

.

•

Use

[

CHANNEL

/

]

to cycle through only

the memorized channels

.

•

U

se [

{

/

{

B

]to cycle through all the channels

including the ones not memorized

.

•

U

se

[

the Number buttons

]

to select a channel

directly

.

• When a memorized channel is selected

,

“Add”

is checked and highlighted as a default

.

• W

h

en an unmemorize

d

c

h

anne

l

is se

l

ecte

d

“Delete” is checked and highlighted as a

default

.

6

Use [K/ L] to select “Add” or

“Delete”, then press [OK].

Manual Channel Preset

CH 2

Add

Delete

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d

an

d

it wi

ll

automatically switch to the next channel so that

you can continue adding or deleting channels

.

7

Press

[

MENU

]

to exit.

DI

G

ITA

L

5

Select the channel num

b

er to a

dd

or

d

e

l

ete.

• Only the major channel is displayed in “Manual

Channel Preset” menu. (The channel number

d

isplayed in the parenthesis is a virtual channel

number

)

• Use

[

CHANNEL

/

]

to cyc

l

e t

h

roug

h

on

l

y

t

he memorized channels

.

• You cannot use

[

{

/

{

B

]

for the digital TV

c

hannel selection

.

• Use

[

the Number buttons

]

to select a channel

d

irectly

.

• W

h

en a memorize

d

c

h

anne

l

is se

l

ecte

d

, “A

dd

”

i

s checked and highlighted as a default.

• Wh

e

n

a

n

u

nm

e

m

o

riz

ed

c

h

a

nn

e

l i

s

se

l

ected

“

Delete” is checked and hi

g

hli

g

hted as a

d

efault

.

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “A

dd

” or

“Delete”, then press [OK]. Then select

the

n

e

x

t

cha

nn

el

to

add

o

r

delete.

• I

f

the setting is complete, press

[

RETURN

]

t

o

activate “Manua

l

C

h

anne

l

Preset”

.

Manual Channel Preset

Add

Delete

DTV 2 (CH - - - )

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

WARNIN

G:

• For the Digital TV channels,

y

ou cannot recover the

d

eleted channels once they are deleted unless you

p

erform the Auto Channel preset again.

7

Press

[

MENU

]

to exit.

CHANNEL SETTING

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 31 2013/02/12 21:06:17

32

E

N

EN

SETTING THE CLOCK

N

ote

• The clock may set itsel

f

automatically a

f

ter you

connect the Antenna/Cable signal and plug in the AC

P

o

w

e

r

co

r

d.

• For Analog auto clock setting, incorrect time may be

obtained depending on the broadcast in

f

ormation. I

f

this occurs, set the “Auto Clock Setting” to “OFF” at

step 4 above and try “Manual Clock Setting” on

p

a

g

e

3

4.

T

his unit can set the time and date automatically by referring to a channel that carries a clock information. If a PBS

(public broadcasting station) is available in your area, follow “Auto Clock Setting” below. If not, follow “Manual Cloc

k

Setting

”

on page 34.

Ma

k

e sur

e

• Th

e

cab

l

e

TV

co

nn

ect

i

o

n

s

a

r

e

co

rr

ect.

• Channels are set. (Refer to page 29.

)

Analog Auto Clock Settin

g

1

Press

[

MENU

]

and use

[

K/ L

]

to select

“General Settin

g

”, then press [OK].

“General Setting” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Clock”, then

press [OK].

“Clock” menu will appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Auto Clock

Setting”, then press [OK].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Auto”, then

press [OK].

Auto Clock Setting

OFF

Auto

Manual

5

Press [MENU] to ex

i

t.

6

Press

[

STANDBY/ON

yy

]

to turn t

h

e

unit to t

h

e stan

dby

mo

d

e.

This unit will search

f

or the time only when the

power is in t

h

e stan

db

y mo

d

e. Initia

ll

y

l

eave it in

standby mode for at least 15 minutes to give this

unit time to set the clock. Once the clock is set, the

unit receives the clock data at 12:00 am & 12:00 pm

when unit is in standby mode. Check the time a

f

ter

the Auto Clock was set, i

f

it is incorrect time then set

t

h

e “Auto C

l

oc

k

Setting“ to “OFF” in step 4 a

b

ove.

T

h

en try “Manua

l

C

l

oc

k

Setting“ on page 34.

Auto Clock Setting

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 32 2013/02/12 21:06:17

33

E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

SETTING THE CLOCK

Note for auto clock settin

g

• The clock may set itself automatically after this unit

receives the antenna/cable signal and plug in the

p

ower cord.

• If the clock is not set correctl

y

, timer recording does

not work properl

y.

• Analog off the air broadcasts have ended. Analog

auto c

l

oc

k

setting wi

ll

no

l

onger

b

e avai

l

a

bl

e except

via Ca

bl

e TV. Try

d

igita

l

auto c

l

oc

k

setting in t

h

is

c

ase.

• For Digital auto clock setting, incorrect time ma

y

be

obtained depending on the broadcast information

.

If this occurs, set the “Auto Clock Settin

g

“ to “OFF” at

step 4 and tr

y

“Manual Clock Setting“ on page 3

4

.

M

anual Auto Clock Settin

g

If the unit chooses an incorrect PBS channel on Cable

TV, set the PBS channel manually by following the steps

b

elow

.

1

Select “Manual” at step 4 in “Analog

Auto Clock Setting” on page 32, then

press [OK]

.

2

Use [the Number buttons] or [

K

/

L

]

to enter your Cable TV Analog PBS

channel number, then press [OK]

.

Set Channel No.

CH 1

3

Press [MENU] to exit an

d

turn t

h

e

unit to t

h

e stan

db

y mo

d

e

.

Digital Auto Clock Setting

1

Press [MENU] an

d

use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect

“Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press [OK]

.

“General Settin

g

” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Clock”

,

then

p

ress [OK]

.

“Clock” menu will appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Auto Clock

Setting”, then press [OK].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Manual”

,

then

p

ress

[

OK

].

Auto Clock Setting

OFF

Auto

Manual

Enable Manual o

p

eration to select the DTV

Channel for receiving the Clock Data and

se

l

ecting your Time Zone

b

e

l

ow

.

5

Press [

{

] to highlight “CH”. Press

{

[

K

/

L

] to select “DTV”, then press

[

B

]

.

Set Channel No.

DTV 1

6

Use [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] or [

K

/

L

]

to enter the desired major channel

number to receive the Clock Data

,

then press [OK].

T

ime ad

j

ustment for each time zone

Atlanti

c

GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 4 hours

Easte

r

n

GMT

(

Greenwich Mean Time

)

- 5 hours

C

entral GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 6 hours

Mou

n

ta

i

n

GMT

(

Greenwich Mean Time

)

- 7 hours

P

acific GMT

(

Greenwich Mean Time

)

- 8 hours

Al

as

k

a

GMT

(

Greenwich Mean Time

)

- 9 hours

Ha

w

a

i

GMT

(

Greenwich Mean Time

)

- 10 hours

7

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

esire

d

time

zone, t

h

en press [OK]

.

Time Zone

Atlantic

Eastern

Central

Mountain

Pacific

Alaska

Hawaii

8

Press

[

MENU

]

to exit and turn the

unit to the standby mode.

This unit will search for the time only when the

power is in the standby mode. Initially leave it in

standby mode for at least 15 minutes to give this

unit time to set the clock. Once the clock is set, the

unit receives the clock data at 12:00 am & 12:00 pm

when unit is in standby mode. Check the time after

the Auto Clock was set, if it is incorrect time then set

the “Auto Clock Settin

g

“ to “OFF” in step 4 above.

T

h

en try “Manua

l

C

l

oc

k

Setting“ on page 34

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 33 2013/02/12 21:06:17

34

E

N

EN

SETTING THE CLOCK

1

Press

[

MENU

]

and use

[

K/

L

]

to select

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

“

General Setting” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “C

l

oc

k

”, t

h

en

press

[

OK

]

.

“

Clock” menu will appear.

3

Use

[

K / L] to select “Daylight Saving

Time”, t

h

en press [OK].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “ON

(

MAR -

NOV)”

,

“ON (APR - OCT)” or “OFF”

,

then

p

ress [OK].

Daylight Saving Time

ON (MAR - NOV)

ON (APR - OCT)

OFF

ON

(

MAR - NOV

)

:

M

ove

f

orward one hour on the second Sunday in

M

arch and move back one hour on the

f

irst

Sun

d

ay in Novem

b

er

.

ON

(

APR - OCT

)

:

M

ove

f

orward one hour on the

f

irst Sunday in

April and move back one hour on the last

Sun

d

ay in Octo

b

er

.

5

Press [MENU] to exit.

When “Daylight Saving Time” is “ON”, the unit clock will

automatically adjust the time in order to fit the daylight

s

aving time period

.

“ON (MAR - NOV)” has been selected as the de

f

ault.

1

Press [MENU] an

d

use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect

“General Setting”, then press [OK]

.

“General Settin

g

” menu will appear

.

2

Use [

K

/

L] to select “Clock”

,

then

press [OK]

.

“Clock” menu will appear

.

3

Use [

K

/ L] to select “Clock Setting”,

then press [OK].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select calendar or time

,

then

p

ress [OK].

Clock Setting

JAN / 06 / 2012 ( FRI )

12 : 00 AM

5

Use

[

{

/

{

B

]

to select an item to set

,

an

d

use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e contents

to suit

y

our preference, then press

[OK] when

y

ou finish setting all the

con

t

en

t

s

.

Clock Setting

JAN / 06 / 2012 ( FRI )

12 : 00 AM

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

The clock starts counting when you press

[

OK

]

.

6

Press [MENU] to exit.

N

ote

• Your setting will be cancelled if you press

[

MENU

]

before pressin

g

[

OK

]

at step 5

.

• Your clock setting will be lost i

f

either there is a power

f

ailure or this unit has been unplugged

f

or more than

1

h

our w

h

en you set t

h

e c

l

oc

k

manua

ll

y

.

• For setting t

h

e

d

ay, year,

h

our, an

d

minute,

[t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

can a

l

so

b

e use

d

.

• You can set the built-in calendar from the year 2012

up to 2061

.

N

ote

• Though it appears in the OSD, “APR - OCT” daylight

savin

g

time is no lon

g

er in use as of 2007 in the U.S.

Manual Clock Setting Daylight Saving Time

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 34 2013/02/12 21:06:17

3

5E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

TUNER SETTINGS

You can easi

l

y switc

h

t

h

e ana

l

og TV (NTSC) an

d

igita

l

TV

(

ATSC) wit

h

t

h

e remote contro

l.

Press [DTV/TV] on the remote control

.

• The Analog mode and Digital mode switch alternately.

A

b

out

d

igita

l

TV

b

roa

d

casting

:

With its high definition broadcast, digital broadcasting far

surpasses analo

g

broadcastin

g

in both its picture and

sound qualit

y.

Wh

at

i

s

t

h

e

min

o

r

c

h

a

nn

e

l

?

B

y

using

h

ig

h

compression tec

h

no

l

og

y

,

d

igita

l

broadcasting offers a service that enables multiple signals

t

o send simultaneously

.

Therefore, you can select more than one program per

major channel since digital broadcasting technology

d

istinguishes between multiple channels broadcast by a

single network

.

: change automatically

: change manually by using [CHANNEL / ] or

[the Number buttons]

CH4-1

18:00

18:30

19:00

19:30

20:00

CH4-2

CH4-1

CH4-3

smallest

CH

smallest

CH

CH4-3

CH4

CH4-2CH4-1

smallest

CH

smallest

CH

ATSC (digital mode)NTSC (analog mode)

[Air Time]

major channel minor channel

Select channels by using [CHANNEL

/

]

or

[

the Number buttons

]

found on remote control

.

[

CHANNEL /

]

U

se [CHANNEL / ] to change the channel

.

[

the Number buttons

]

Press the channel number with

[

the Number buttons

]

to

select a channel you want to watch.

<

Analo

g

TV Channels>

En

te

r

t

h

e

c

h

a

nn

e

l n

u

m

be

r wi

t

h[the Number buttons

]

to

se

l

ect a c

h

anne

l

you want to watc

h

.

For 1-digit number

e.g.) 2 ch:

[

0

]

+

[

2

]

,

[

2

]

+

[

•

]

o

r

[

2

]

+ l

ea

v

e

i

t

fo

r 2

seco

n

ds.

For 2-

d

igit num

b

er

e.g.) 12ch:

[

1

]

+

[

2

]

<Di

g

ital TV Channels

>

Enter the ma

j

or and minor channel number with

[

the Number buttons

]

to select a channel

y

ou want to

w

atc

h

.

For 1-digit number

e.

g

.) 2.1 ch

:

major channel

[

0

]

+

[

2

]

o

r

[

2

]

+

[

•

]

min

o

r

c

h

a

nn

e

l

[

0

]

+

[

1

]

,

[

1

]

+

[

•

]

o

r

[

1

]

+ leave it for 2 seconds.

For 2-di

g

it number

If 2 channel numbers are pressed consecutivel

y

, that

n

umber will become the major channel

.

e.

g

.) 35.1ch:

m

a

j

or channel

[

3

]

+

[

5

]

+

[

•

]

min

o

r

c

h

a

nn

e

l

[

1

]

• If

y

ou enter 1 or 2 digit for major channel and leave it for

2 seconds, the number will be taken as the major

channel and lowest minor channel of the major channel

will be displa

y

ed

.

Note

•

It may take up to 5 to 7 seconds to switch the digital

T

V

c

h

a

nn

e

l

s.

•

In digital TV broadcasting, 2 or more channels, called

minor channels, are simultaneously broadcast on one

main channel, called major channel.

Switching Analog Mode / Digital Mode

Channel Selection

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 35 2013/02/12 21:06:17

3

6

E

N

EN

1

Press [AUDIO] to cycle through

available audio languages

.

English

• W

h

en you press

[

AUDIO

]

, se

l

ecte

d

l

anguage

wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

aye

d

on t

h

e TV screen

.

• Ever

y

time

y

ou press

[

AUDIO

]

, the language

will be switched

.

e.g.) English

➔

S

p

anish

➔

U

nkn

o

w

n

• Available languages di

ff

er depending on the

b

roa

d

cast

.

• The language in

f

ormation display will

automatica

ll

y

d

isappear

.

• When

y

ou record digital TV broadcasting, the

audio language you have selected will be

r

eco

r

ded.

N

ot

e

•

You cannot change the audio language

f

or the

recording o

f

digital TV broadcasting

.

•

Pressin

g

[

AUDIO

]

does

n

ot

co

n

t

r

o

l

e

x

te

rn

a

l

de

vi

ce

aud

i

o.

•

When there is only one audio channel on the

broadcast, pressin

g

[

AUDIO

]

does not display

anything

.

TUNER SETTINGS

Selecting TV Audio

Th

is section

d

escri

b

es

h

ow to switc

h

t

h

e TV au

d

io. W

h

en you recor

d

a TV program, on

l

y t

h

e au

d

io se

l

ecte

d

h

ere wi

ll

b

e

recor

d

e

d

.

Digita

l

TV

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 36 2013/02/12 21:06:18

3

7E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

1

Press [MENU] and use [

K

/

L

]

to select

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

“Genera

l

Setting” menu wi

ll

appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Channel”, then

press [OK].

“Channel” menu will appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “TV Au

d

io

Se

l

ect”, t

h

en press [OK]

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Stereo” or

“SAP”, then press [OK].

TV Audio Select

Stereo

SAP

Ste

r

eo:

Outputs main-au

d

io

.

SAP (secondary audio program)

:

Outputs su

b

-au

d

io

.

5

Press [MENU] to ex

i

t.

Note on recordin

g

analo

g

TV audio

• When you record an analog TV program available in

secon

d

au

d

io or stereo, you

h

ave to se

l

ect eit

h

er

“Stereo” or “SAP” in “General Setting” menu

beforehand. Refer to the followin

g

table to check an

appropriate setting

.

S

electe

d

au

d

i

o

Broa

d

cast

au

d

i

o

D

isc

recor

d

ing

A

u

d

io

o

utput

S

tere

o

S

TERE

O

+

S

A

P

S

TERE

O

S

TERE

O

S

TERE

O

S

TERE

O

S

TERE

O

MONO+SA

P

M

ON

O

MON

O

M

O

N

O

MO

N

O

M

O

N

O

S

A

P

S

TEREO+SA

P

SAP SAP

S

TERE

O

S

TERE

O

S

TERE

O

MONO+SA

P

SAP SAP

MONO

M

ON

O

MONO

TUNER SETTINGS

Analo

g

TV

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 37 2013/02/12 21:06:18

38

E

N

EN

TUNER SETTINGS

Di

g

ital TV has its own closed captions called DTV CC. Use this menu to chan

g

e the settin

g

s

f

or DTV CC.

1

Press [MENU] and use [

K

/

L

]

to select

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

“General Setting” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Disp

l

ay”, t

h

en

press [OK]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “DTV CC”, then

press [OK]

.

Language

Screen Saver

FL Dimmer

DTV CC

CC Style

V-Chip

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Caption Service”,

then press [OK]

.

DTV CC

Caption Service

Recording

5

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to t

h

e

d

esire

d

DTV c

l

ose

d

caption, t

h

en press [OK].

Caption Service

OFF

Service1

Service2

Service3

Service4

Service5

Service6

OFF:

Select if you do not want DTV CC. This is the

default.

Se

rvi

ce

1

to

Se

rvi

ce

6:

Select one of these before changing any other

item in the closed caption menu. Choose

“Service 1” under normal circumstances

.

6

Press [MENU] to exit.

DTV Closed Caption

Di

g

ita

l

TV

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 38 2013/02/12 21:06:18

3

9E

N

EN

Connections Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connections Basic Setu

p

Basic Setup Recording Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

1

Press [MENU] and use

[

K

/

L

]

to select

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

“General Setting” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Disp

l

ay”, t

h

en

press [OK].

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “CC Style”, then

press [OK].

Language

Screen Saver

FL Dimmer

DTV CC

CC Style

V-Chip

4

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “User Setting”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

CC Style

User Setting

Font Size

Font Style

Font Opacity

Font Color

Edge Type

Edge Color

Back Opacity

Back Color

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “ON”, then press

[

OK

]

.

User Setting

ON

OFF

TUNER SETTINGS

Digital TV can also change the style o

f

its closed caption such as

f

ont, color or size, etc

.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

Digital TV

Closed Caption Style

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 39 2013/02/12 21:06:18

4

0

E

N

EN

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e item an

d

switch the setting

f

or each item you

want to set, t

h

en press [OK].

• When “User Setting” is set to “ON”, you can set

the following items. CC style set by “User

Setting” will be displayed.

• The setting description for each item is shown

below

.

<F

o

n

t

S

iz

e

>

Font size of the displayed caption can be

switched as below

.

Font Size

Large

Middle

Small

Font style of the displayed caption can be

s

wi

tc

h

ed

as

be

l

o

w

.

Font Style

Style1

Style2

Style3

Style4

Style5

Style6

Style7

Style8

<Font Opacit

y

>

Font transparency (Opacity) o

f

the displayed

caption can

b

e switc

h

e

d

as

b

e

l

ow

.

Font Opacity

Solid

Transparent

Translucent

Flash

<Font Co

l

or

>

Font color of the displa

y

ed caption can be

s

wi

tc

h

ed

as

be

l

o

w

.

Font Color

White

Black

Red

Green

Blue

Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

<Edge Type

>

Edge type of the displayed caption can be

s

wi

tc

h

ed

as

be

l

o

w

.

Edge Type

None

Raised

Depressed

Uniform

L.Shadow

R.Shadow

Edge color of the displayed caption can be

switched as below

.

Edge Color

White

Black

Red

Green

Blue

Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

Background transparency (Opacity) o

f

the

d

isp

l

aye

d

caption can

b

e switc

h

e

d

as

b

e

l

ow

.

Back Opacity

Solid

Transparent

Translucent

Flash

<B

ac

k

Co

l

o

r

>

Background color of the displa

y

ed caption can

be

s

wi

tc

h

ed

as

be

l

o

w

.

Back Color

White

Black

Red

Green

Blue

Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

7

Press

[

MENU

]

to exit.

TUNER SETTINGS

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 40 2013/02/12 21:06:18

41

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

INFORMATION ON RECORDING

Logos Attributes

8cm/12cm, single-sided,

single layer disc

Approx. max. recording time

(SLP mode):

360 minutes (4.7GB) (for 12cm)

108 minutes (1.4GB) (for 8cm)

DVD+RW DVD+R

DVD-RW DVD-R

Th

is unit can recor

d

to DVD+RW, DVD+R, DVD-RW an

d

D

V

D

-

R.

DVD+R/DVD-R can on

l

y

b

e recor

d

e

d

to once. DVD+RW

/

DVD-RW can be recorded to and erased many times.

D

VD-RW/-R will be recorded in the DVD+VR mode

automaticall

y

in this unit.

• The following discs are recommended for good

recording quality and are proven to be compatible with

this unit. However, dependin

g

on the media condition

the unit ma

y

not read the disc properl

y.

Verbatim DVD+R 8x

,

DVD+RW 4x

,

DVD-R 8x, DVD-RW 2x

J

V

C

DVD-RW 4x

Maxell DVD+R 4x/8x/16x

,

DVD-R 8x/16x

SONY DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD+RW 4x

TDK DVD+R 4x/8x/16x

Per

f

ormance o

f

any other discs are not guaranteed

.

• You can pla

y

back DVD+RW on most DVD pla

y

ers

without finalizing. However, if you have added or

deleted chapters, or made chapters hidden,

y

ou

must per

f

orm “Make Edits Compatible” be

f

ore being

able to see those effects on other units.

(

Refer to

page 100 for more details.) To pla

y

back discs other

than DVD+RW on other DVD players, you will need

to

f

inalize. (Re

f

er to page 65.)

Recor

d

a

bl

e Disc

s

Be

f

ore you make a recording, read the

f

ollowing in

f

ormation.

• DVD-RW recor

d

e

d

in t

h

e mo

d

e ot

h

er t

h

an +VR is not

recordable on this unit unless you erase all contents in

the disc (refer to page 99)

.

• DVD-R recorded in the mode other than +VR is not

r

eco

r

dab

l

e

o

n

t

hi

s

u

ni

t.

Unrecor

d

a

bl

e Disc

s

HDD : 999 title

s

99 chapters per title

D

V

D

: 49 titles per disc

254 chapters per disc

99 chapters per title

Maximum recordable numbers of title / chapters

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 41 2013/02/12 21:06:18

42

E

N

EN

You can select a recording mode among 6 options, and

the recording time will depend on the recording mode

y

ou select as follows

.

61 hrs

123 hrs

154 hrs

185 hrs

247 hrs

371 hrs

100 hrs

201 hrs

251 hrs

302 hrs

403 hrs

604 hrs

208 hrs

417 hrs

521 hrs

626 hrs

835 hrs

1252 hrs

Recording

mode

Recording

time

Video/sound

quality

60 min

120 min

150 min

180 min

240 min

360 min

12cm Disc

8cm Disc

(good)

(best)

HQ

SP

SPP

LP

EP

SLP

18 min

36 min

45 min

54 min

72 min

108 min

HQ

SP

SPP

LP

EP

SLP

(good)

(best)

HQ

SP

SPP

LP

EP

SLP

HDD

(Internal)

(good)

(best)

HQ

SP

SPP

LP

EP

SLP

(good)

(best)

HQ

SP

SPP

LP

EP

SLP

Disc size

MDR533H

(320 GB)

MDR535H

(500 GB)

MDR537H

(1 TB)

• The recording time is only an estimate. The actual

recording time may differ

.

• T

h

e au

d

io an

d

vi

d

eo qua

l

ity gets poorer as t

h

e recor

d

ing

time becomes longer

.

• Eac

h

time

[

REC MODE

]

is presse

d

, recor

d

ing mo

d

e an

d

its allowed recording time will be displayed. (Refer to

page 24.

)

N

ote

• T

h

is unit cannot recor

d

to CD-RW or CD-R

.

•All high definition pictures will be down

c

onverted to the standard definition pictures

when the

y

are recorded on this unit.

• DVD+RW/+R, DVD-RW/-R and CD-RW/-R recorded on

a personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder may

not be played back if the disc is damaged or dirty or

if there is condensation on the player’s lens.

• If you record a disc using a personal computer, even

if it is recorded in a compatible format it may not be

played back because of the settings of the

application software used to create the disc. (Chec

k

with the software publisher for more detailed

information.

)

• Since the recording is made by the VBR (variable bit

rate) method, depending on the picture you are

recording, the actual remaining time for recording

may be a little shorter than the remaining time

d

isp

l

aye

d

on t

h

e TV screen

.

•

You cannot record a copy-protected program

using this unit. (Copy-protected signal is included

i

n DVD-vi

d

eo, some sate

ll

ite an

d

ca

bl

e

b

roa

d

casts.) P

l

ease contact your programming

provider

f

or type o

f

copy protection applied to

p

rogram

.

• You cannot record “copy-once only” program’s on

DVD

.

Recordin

g

Mode

INFORMATION ON RECORDING

HDD is a specia

l

d

evice w

h

ic

h

as

h

ig

h

recor

d

ing

d

ensity

and is suited

f

or long-time recording or high-speed

cueing but by contrast, has many

f

actors which can cause

b

rea

k

age. Use HDD on t

h

e assumption t

h

at you s

h

ou

ld

d

ub the recorded programs to a DVD to protect

y

our

precious vi

d

eos

.

HDD is a temporary storage

l

ocation:

HDD is not a permanent storage location of the recorded

contents. Be sure to use it as a temporar

y

storage location

until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub

t

h

e

m

to

a

DVD

.

Be sure to dub (back up) data promptl

y

if

y

ou find

a

bnormalities in HDD:

I

f

there is mechanical trouble with the HDD, grinding or

ot

h

er soun

d

s may

b

e

h

ear

d

or

bl

oc

k

y noise may appear

on the image. I

f

you continue to use as it is, deterioration

may continue an

d

eventua

ll

y t

h

e HDD may not

b

e usa

bl

e

at all. I

f

you notice these symptoms o

f

a

f

ailing HDD,

promptly dub the data to a DVD. When an HDD

f

ails,

recovery o

f

recorded content (data) may be impossible

.

About the remaining capacity of HDD recording time

:

The on-screen indication o

f

the possible recording time

left on HDD / DVD may differ from the actual recordable

time as this unit employs the variable bit rate encoding

system which varies the recording (storage) amount of

data in conformity with the amount of information on the

vi

deo.

Be

f

ore recording to the HDD, ensure there is su

ff

icient

space on t

h

e HDD

b

y

d

e

l

eting unnecessary tit

l

es in

a

d

vance

.

A

bout

HD

D

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 42 2013/02/12 21:06:18

43

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

BEFORE RECORDING

Use

t

hi

s

f

eatu

r

e

to

m

a

k

e

u

nfin

a

liz

ed

+VR m

ode

d

i

scs

reco

r

ded

o

n

a

n

ot

h

e

r

u

ni

t

r

eco

r

dab

l

e

o

n

t

hi

s

u

ni

t.

Wh

e

n

you ma

k

e an a

dd

itiona

l

recor

d

ing on t

h

is unit wit

h

“Ma

k

e

Recor

d

ing Compati

bl

e” set to “ON”, t

h

e tit

l

e menu is

automatically converted to our style

.

1) Press [MENU] and use [

K

/

L

]

to select “General

S

etting”, then press [OK].

“General Settin

g

” menu will appear.

2) Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Recordin

g

”, then press [OK].

“Recordin

g

” menu will appear

.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Make Recording Compatible”,

t

hen

p

ress [OK]

.

4) Use [

K

/

L

] to select “ON” or “OFF”

,

then press [OK].

Make Recording Compatible

ON

OFF

O

N

:

Title list will be replaced when

y

ou make

additional recordings to the discs recorded b

y

ot

h

e

r

u

ni

ts.

O

FF

:

Pro

h

i

b

iting a

dd

itiona

l

recor

d

ing to t

h

e

d

isc

that has a title list created b

y

other units

.

5

)

Press [MENU] to exit

.

You can set a s

p

ecified time for cha

p

ter marks.

1) Press [MENU] and use [

K

/

L

]

to select “General

S

etting”, then press [OK].

“General Setting” menu will appear.

2

)

Use [K

/

L

] to select “Recording”, then press [OK].

“Recording” menu will appear

.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

]

to select “Auto Cha

p

ter”, then

p

ress [OK]

.

4

)

Use [K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

time option, t

h

en

press

[

OK

]

.

Auto Chapter

OFF

5 minutes

10 minutes

15 minutes

30 minutes

60 minutes

5) Press [MENU] to exit

.

Not

e

• The interval for auto chapter ma

y

be up to two

minutes different from the time option you set.

• A blank chapter may be created depending on the

remaining time of the disc

.

Y

ou can record the DTV Closed Caption as the part of the

image

f

or the recording program and see the recorded

c

l

ose

d

caption even wit

h

t

h

e TV t

h

at is not c

l

ose

d

caption

compliant

.

1) Press [MENU] and use

[

K

/

L

] to select “General

S

etting”, t

h

en press [OK].

2) Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Display”, then press [OK].

3) Use [

K

/

L

] to select “DTV C

C

”

, then press [OK].

4)

Use [

K

/

L

]

to select “Recording”, then press [OK].

•

If “Caption Service” is set to “OFF”, you cannot select

“Recording”

.

5) Use [

K

/

L

] to select “ON”, then press [OK].

Recording

ON

OFF

6)

Press [MENU] to exit.

Note

• I

f

“Caption Service” is set to “OFF”, the caption will

not

b

e recor

d

e

d.

Make Recording Compatible Recording the DTV Closed Caption

Setting for Auto Chapter Recording from a Cable Box or Satellite

When recordin

g

from an external tuner like cable/satellite

b

ox

,

the box will need to be turned on and set to the

c

hannel

y

ou wish to record. You will not be able to watch

another pro

g

ram from the box as the recorder will be

r

ecordin

g

the channel the cable/satellite box is set to.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 43 2013/02/12 21:06:19

44

E

N

EN

BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING

If you are recording to the HDD, press

[

HDD

]

first, then

procee

d

to step 2

.

If you are recording to a disc, press

[

DVD] first

.

1

Insert a recordable disc (refer to pa

g

e

27 on how to insert a disc)

.

Align the disc to

the disc tray guide.

* Make sure the disc is compatible with this unit.

(Refer to page 41 for the list of compatible discs.

)

It may ta

k

e a w

h

i

l

e to

l

oa

d

t

he disc data a

f

ter the disc tray closes.

• When insertin

g

a brand-new DVD+RW/DVD-

R

W, the unit automaticall

y

starts to format.

(

Except when HDD is recordin

g

, or when there

is a timer pro

g

ram which starts in 15 minutes.)

• If titles have been recorded on the disc

,

the

title list is displa

y

ed. Press

[

STOP

C

]

to

e

xi

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e

li

st.

2

Press [REC MODE] repeatedly to

se

l

ect a recor

d

ing mo

d

e

.

Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 42.

DVDSP(2Hr) 0h58m

3

Select the appropriate external input

c

h

anne

l

by

pressing [SOURCE] or

[

CHANNEL

/

]

.

Press [DTV/TV] to select Analog TV or

Di

g

ital TV, then use [CHANNEL

/

]

or [the Number buttons] and [ • ] (

f

or

Di

g

ital TV channels) to select a

d

esired channel to record.

Refer to “Switching Analog Mode/Digital Mode”

and “Channel Selection“ on page 35

.

CH 12

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e steps to recor

d

TV programs

.

N

ot

e

• When playback o

f

a recorded program is blocked by

t

h

e V-c

h

ip setting, “PROTECTED PROGRAM

b

y **”

appears (** may vary

d

epen

d

ing on t

h

e rating). In

such case, check the V-chip setting. (Please re

f

er to

page 110

f

or more details.

)

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 44 2013/02/12 21:06:19

45

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING

5

Press

[

STOP

C

]

to stop recording.

As for DVD recording, the title list will appear

automatically a

f

ter writing to a disc complete.

(Refer to “Guide to a Title List” on page 83.

)

e.

g

.) DVD+R

Writing to Disc

Please finalize the disc when the writing is

completed before playing back on other DVD

players.

90%

1SP(2Hr)

2

EMPTY SPACE

1:41:17

SP (2Hr)

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

• Pr

ess

[

STOP

C

]

to

e

xi

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e

li

st.

4

Press [REC] to start recor

d

ing

.

“

I

HDD”

o

r “

I

DVD” will be displa

y

ed for 4 seconds.

e.g.

)

DV

D

I DVD

SP(2Hr) 2h00m

Press

[

PAUSE

F

]

to pause recording.

Pr

ess

[PAUSE

F

]]

o

r[REC] again to restart

recording

.

To set one-touch timer recordin

g

(OTR)..

.

This is a simple way to set the recording time in blocks

of 30 minutes

.

Pr

ess

[

REC

]

repeatedly until the desired recording time

(30 minutes to 6 hours) appears on the TV screen

.

One-touch timer recordin

g

will start

.

0h30m 1h00m

(normal recording)

5h30m6h00m

I 0h30m

T

o c

h

ange t

h

e recor

d

ing

l

engt

h

d

uring t

h

e one-

touc

h

timer recor

d

ing

:

P

r

ess

[

REC

]

repeatedl

y

until the desired length appear.

T

o cancel the one-touch timer recording within the

specified time

:

Pr

ess

[

STOP

C

]

.

Wh

en t

h

e recor

d

ing is comp

l

ete

d

, t

h

e unit wi

ll

as

k

y

ou w

h

et

h

er to turn t

h

e unit to t

h

e stan

db

y mo

d

e

except un

d

er con

d

itions

l

iste

d

b

e

l

ow

.

- If a timer recording is programmed to start in 5 minutes

.

-

During pla

y

back of HDD or DVD

.

-

While displaying menus or in

f

ormation on the screen.

• The unit will be turned to the standb

y

mode automaticall

y

i

f

y

ou select “Yes” or if

y

ou do not repl

y

in 1 minute

.

N

ote

• When you press

[

REC

]

,

recording starts immediately and continues until the HDD or disc is

f

ull, record 12 hours to

HDD or you stop recor

d

ing

.

• This unit cannot record ima

g

es with an aspect ratio of 16:9. The 16:9 ima

g

es will be recorded as 4:3.

• When the unit clock has not been set, the space for a date and time of title names will be blank.

• When you record a TV program, you have to select the TV channel audio be

f

orehand. Only the selected channel

audio will be recorded. Re

f

er to “Selecting TV Audio” on pages 36-37

f

or more details

.

• This unit cannot record in both stereo and SAP (secondar

y

audio program) at the same time.

• You cannot chan

g

e the recordin

g

mode durin

g

the recordin

g

pause mode

.

• You can change a channel to be recorded during the recording pause mode

.

• You can pla

y

back a title on one component while making a recording on other. To do so, simpl

y

select the

c

omponent (HDD or DVD) you like to use for the playback by pressing

[

HDD

]

o

r

[

DVD

]

durin

g

HDD / DVD

recording. And then follow the normal pla

y

back procedure

.

• If playback and recording are in progress at the same time, select the appropriate component by pressing

[

HDD

]

o

r[DVD] before you press [PAUSE

F

]

o

r [STOP

C

]

to

p

ause or sto

p

the o

p

eration

.

Note for one-touch timer recordin

g

• The remaining recording time will be displayed on the front panel display during one-touch timer recording. Press

[

DISPLAY

]

to

see

i

t

o

n

t

h

e

TV

sc

r

ee

n

.

• Unlike the timer recording, you can perform the following operations during one-touch timer recording.

- Turning the power to the standby mode to stop one-touch timer recording.

- Using

[

REC

]

o

r

[

STOP

C

]

o

n

t

h

e

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l

.

• You cannot use the pause function during one-touch timer recording

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 45 2013/02/12 21:06:19

4

6

E

N

EN

AUTOSTART RECORDING

1

W

h

en watc

h

ing TV programs

through this unit’s tuner, use [

H

]

,

[

E

]

or

[

REPLA

Y

] to

l

ocate your

d

esire

d

point to start recor

d

ing

.

• The autostart recordin

g

information will

appear. Refer to pa

g

e 23.

2:59:44 / 3:31:31

10:42AM

10:10AM

7:10AM

2Press [REC] to start recording.

100/100

1/ 1 0:00:34 / 0:32:34

HDD SP 1h53m

HDD

I

From the selected point, the contents o

f

the

autostart recor

d

ing

b

ecome a recor

d

ing tit

l

e in

the HDD while the unit continues to recor

d

the

current content o

f

the channel

.

3

Press

[

STOP

C

]

twice to stop

recordin

g.

The recordin

g

stops and new autostar

t

recordin

g

b

egins

.

• I

f

you press

[

STOP

C

]

once, the image on the

TV screen

g

oes back to current content of the

channel while the recordin

g

continues

.

Ever

y

time

y

ou turn on this unit, this unit automaticall

y

records the channel currentl

y

viewed and temporaril

y

stores

the recorded content to the HDD (Autostart recording). B

y

using this function,

y

ou can pause or go back the TV

program

y

ou are currentl

y

watching, and

y

ou can also start recording the whole TV program even at the middle of the

T

V program. The temporar

y

recording can be made up to 6 hours of time range. If the recording exceeds 6 hours, the

e

arliest recordin

g

will be overwritten

.

N

ot

e

•

In the autostart recording, when you display the DTV

program information, the information will be

recorded as the part of the picture

.

•

I

f

there is not enough recordable space on HDD to

record

f

rom the selected point to current point, you

cannot record the content o

f

au

t

os

t

ar

t

recording

.

•

When you record the content of the autostart

recording, the recording mode will be SP

.

•

When you are recording the contents of the autostart

recording, if

y

ou record the part that is cop

y

-protected,

“Copy guard detected.” appears and you are not able to

watch that

p

art

.

The autostart recording will be stopped and cleared

in following cases:

- Turning the power to the standby mode

- Start recordin

g

- Editing titles or goes into editing menu

- De

l

eting tit

l

es (DVD on

l

y)

- Start dubbing

- C

h

anging input c

h

anne

l

s

- Using any

f

unctions in “Disc Edit” or “HDD Menu

”

- Selecting following menus:

“General Setting”

➔

“Display”

➔

“V-Chip

”

➔

“D

o

wnl

oadab

l

e

Rating

”

“General Setting”

➔

“

C

h

a

nn

e

l”

➔

“A

uto

C

h

a

nn

e

l Pr

eset”

“General Setting”

➔

“

C

h

a

nn

e

l”

➔

“M

a

n

ua

l

C

h

a

nn

e

l

Pr

eset”

• The autostart recording will automatically resume for

a new recording

Recording the Contents of the Autostart Recordin

g

For how to playback the autostart recording, refer to “Playing Back the Autostart Recording” on page 78.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 46 2013/02/12 21:06:19

47

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

TIMER RECORDING

1

Press [TIMER PROG.]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “New Program”,

t

hen

p

ress [OK].

Timer Programming

1/1

THU FEB/09 11:30AM

Skip Date Start End CH

New Program

•

I

f

there are 6 or more programs, use

[

H

/

G

]

to change pages.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to enter the date, then

p

ress

[

B

]

.

DTV 69.1

OFF FEB/10

SP 2h00m

SP

- - : - - - - : - -

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

HDD

Mode

Start End

Daily

MON-SAT

JAN/01

JAN/31

MON-FRI

SAT

FRI

SUN

4

Use [

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

]

or

[

t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] to enter t

h

e

s

tart and end time, then press [

B

].

DTV 69.1

OFF FEB/10

SP 2h00m

SP

10 : 30AM - - : - -

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

HDD

Mode

Start End

•

You cannot make a Timer Recording program

that exceeds 12 hours

.

You can program t

h

e unit to recor

d

up to 36 programs wit

h

in a mont

h

in a

d

vance. Dai

l

y or wee

kl

y program recor

d

ings

a

re a

l

so avai

l

a

bl

e

.

Be

f

ore recording, make sure

• Set the clock before setting a timer programming.

• If you are recording to a disc, insert a recordable disc with enough recordable space

.

G

uide to Timer Programming Displa

y

Timer Programming

1/1

SP (1:00)

FEB/10/12 10:30 AM 69.1 SP

Skip Date Start End CH

FEB/10 10:30AM 11:30AM DTV69. 1

New Program

THU FEB/09 11:30AM

1

5

3

4

2

6

1

Title of a timer program (Contains date, time, channel,

recording mode of the program

)

2

Cu

rr

e

n

t

date

a

n

d

t

im

e

3 Recordin

g

mode, and len

g

th of the recordin

g

4 Timer program list

5 Total number of pa

g

es and current pa

g

e (6 pa

g

es

maximum

)

6 Recordin

g

media (

“

”

(

HDD

)

or

“

”

(

DVD

))

When pressing

[

L

]

at

t

h

e current

d

ate, t

h

e

d

ate will change as

f

o

ll

o

w

s.

e.g.) January 1st

I

nstructions continue on the next pa

g

e

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 47 2013/02/12 21:06:19

4

8

E

N

EN

5

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

] to se

l

ect Ana

l

o

g

(“- - -”) / Digita

l

(“DTV”) mo

d

e or

Externa

l

input (L1 / L2), t

h

en press

[

B

]

.

e.

g

.) externa

l

input mo

d

e

L1

OFF FEB/10

SP 1h00m

SP

10 : 30AM 11 : 30AM

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

HDD

Mode

Start End

satellite box), select L1 or L2

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] or [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] to se

l

ect

the Channel Number to Record, then press

[

B

]

.

For Digital mode, select both Major and

Minor Channels. Refer to “How to Select a

Channel Number for the Timer Recording” on

page 49 for more details.

e.g.) analog mode

OFF FEB/10

SP 1h00m

SP

10 : 30AM 11 : 30AM

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

HDD

Mode

Start End

- - - 10

OFF FEB/10

SP 1h00m

SP

10 : 30AM 11 : 30AM

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

HDD

Mode

Start End

DTV 69.1

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e Recor

d

ing

me

d

ia (“HDD” or “DVD”), t

h

en press

[

B

]

.

e.g.) recording to DVD

OFF FEB/10

SP 1h00m

SP

10 : 30AM 11 : 30AM

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

DVD

Mode

Start End

DTV 69.1

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a Recor

d

ing mo

d

e.

DTV 69.1

OFF FEB/10

SP 1h00m

SP

10 : 30AM 11 : 30AM

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

DVD

Mode

Start End

• You can check the remaining recordable space

o

f

the disc when you select the Recording

mode

.

DTV 69.1

OFF FEB/10

SP 1h00m

SP

10 : 30AM 11 : 30AM

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

DVD

Mode

Start End

Auto Recor

d

in

g

mo

d

e se

l

ect..

.

When “Auto” is selected as a Recordin

g

mode, the unit

ca

l

cu

l

ates

h

o

w m

uc

h

t

im

e

i

s

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

o

n

t

h

e

d

i

sc

a

n

d

selects the Best Recording mode available

automatically to complete Recording the program

.

DTV 69.1

OFF FEB/10

Auto 1h00m

Auto

10 : 30AM 11 : 30AM

Skip

CH

Date

REC To

DVD

Mode

Start End

• “Auto” is only available for One program in the Timer

P

rogram list

.

Alternate recording (DVD only)...

In the

f

ollowing cases, the unit will detect it and

automatically record to the HDD even when DVD is

se

l

ecte

d

as t

h

e recor

d

ing me

d

ia.

- If

t

h

e

r

e

i

s

n

o

r

eco

r

dab

l

e

d

i

sc

in

t

h

e

u

ni

t

- I

f

the disc does not have enough space to complete the

r

ecordin

g

- I

f

the material is “copy-once” program and prohibited to

b

e recor

d

e

d

on a DVD

- If the disc is not available because the repairin

g

process is

c

ancelled halfwa

y

This

f

eature is available only

f

or Timer Recording. Not

available

f

or One-Touch Timer Recording

.

8

Press [OK] w

h

en a

ll

items are

entere

d.

will appear on the

f

ront panel display.

Timer Programming

1/1

THU FEB/09 11:30AMSP (1:00)

FEB/10/12 10:30 AM 69.01 SP

Skip Date Start End CH

FEB/10 10:30AM 11:30AM DTV69. 1

New Program

Your pro

g

ram settin

g

is now stored

.

• To set another program, repeat steps 2 to 8.

• To exit,

p

ress

[

TIMER PROG.

]

or

[

MENU

]

.

• When 2 or more programs are overlapped,

“

Timer pro

g

ram overlapped” appears, and the

overlapped program will be displayed in blue.

• To correct the timer program refer to

“

Checking, cancelling, or correcting the Timer

P

rogramming information” on page 49.

TIMER RECORDING

Note

• If you have not set the clock yet

:

E

ntr

y

screen for the clock setting will appear instead

of the Timer Pro

g

rammin

g

list at step 1. Continue

with the step 5 in “Manual Clock Settin

g

” on pa

g

e 34

before settin

g

a Timer Pro

g

rammin

g.

• Use

[

s

/

B

]

to move the cursor to the left and the

ri

g

ht in the entry screen for the Timer Programmin

g

.

• You cannot make a Timer Recording program that

exceeds 12 hours.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 48 2013/02/12 21:06:20

49

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

How to Select a Channel Number

f

or the Timer Recording

A

na

l

og TV

F

or c

h

anne

l

num

b

er 2-6 press, press

[

B

]

or

[

•

]

to

d

eci

d

e t

h

e c

h

anne

l

s. For ot

h

er c

h

anne

l

s (7-69),

the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.

A

na

l

og Ca

bl

e

TV

F

or c

h

anne

l

num

b

er 1-12 press, press

[

B

]

or

[

•

]

to

d

eci

d

e t

h

e c

h

anne

l

s. For ot

h

er c

h

anne

l

s (13

-

1

25), the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.

Di

g

ital TV

F

or channel number 1-9 press, press

[

B

]

or

[

•

]

to decide the channels. For other channels (10-99),

the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.

Digital Cable TV

F

or channel number 1-13 press, press

[

B

]or [ •

]

to decide the channels. For other channels (14

-

1

35), the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.

Minor channel

s

F

or channel number 1-9 press, press

[

B

]

or

[

•

]

to decide the channels. For other channels (10-99),

the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.

<Hint

>

• You can decide the 1-digit channel number by pressing 0 first , then enter desired 1-digit channel number.

e.

g

.) “5”: [0]

+

[5]

• For selecting the channels with

[

K

/

L

]

you need to press

[

B

]

or

[ •

]

to decide the channel number.

• For se

l

ecting t

h

e minor c

h

anne

l

s wit

h

[

K

/

L

]

, p

l

ease ma

k

e sure t

h

e minor c

h

anne

l

you are se

l

ecting exists.

[

K

/

L

]

d

oes not s

k

ip t

h

e non-existing minor c

h

anne

l

s.

TIMER RECORDING

Checking, cancelling, or correcting the Timer

P

rogramming in

f

ormation

1) Press [TIMER PROG.]

.

2

)

Check the information

.

Timer Programming

THU FEB/09 11:30AMSP (1:00)

FEB/10/12 10:30 AM 69.01 SP

Skip Date Start End CH

FEB/10 10:30AM 11:30AM DTV69. 1

New Program

3-A) To Delete the Timer program:

1 Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the program

y

ou want to

delete, then

p

ress [OK].

2 Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

Confirmation window will appear.

3 Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress [OK].

3-B) To Correct the Timer program:

1 Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the Program

y

ou want to

correct, then press [OK]

.

2 Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Program C

h

ange”, t

h

en

press

[

OK

]

.

3 Correct t

h

e Timer program

b

y using

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

,

t

h

en press [OK].

4) Press [TIMER PROG.] to exit.

1

)

Press [STOP

C

] on t

h

e Remote contro

l

.

2

)

Co

n

f

irm

at

i

on

message will appear. Select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

•

To Stop the Timer Recording immediatel

y

, press

[

C

STOP

]

on the unit.

To stop the Timer Recordin

g

in pro

g

ress

N

ot

e

•

P

ress

[

TIMER PROG.

]

to c

h

ec

k

t

h

e Timer Recor

d

ing in

p

ro

g

ress

.

•

As to the Timer Recordin

g

in pro

g

ress (which is shown in red

in the timer program list),

y

ou onl

y

can edit the end time.

The chan

g

es made durin

g

recordin

g

will be reco

g

nized as

onl

y

specific to that recording in progress and it will not

affect the dail

y

or the weekl

y

recording setting.

Skip the Timer Recordin

g

Perio

d

You can deactivate the Timer Recording Period (Daily,

MON-SAT, MON-FRI or Weekl

y

) temporaril

y.

1) In Stop mode, press [TIMER PROG.].

2

)

S

elect the Periodical Timer Recording program

y

ou

w

ant to skip using

[

K

/

L

]

,

then

p

ress [OK].

3

)

S

elect “Pro

g

ram Chan

g

e” usin

g

[

K

/

L

]

, then press

[

OK

]

.

4

)

M

ove the cursor to the “Skip”

f

ield usin

g

[

{

/

{

B

],

t

hen select “ON” using

[

K

/

L

] and then press

[

OK

]

to

a

ctivate the setting.

•

“

” will be displayed on the left side of the timer

program

.

• The setting will go back to “OFF” a

f

ter the program

is skipped once

.

Putting Names on Timer Program

s

1) In Stop mode, press [TIMER PROG.]

.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the Program that you want to

edit the timer program nam

e

,

then press [OK].

3)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Edit Title Name”, then press

[

OK

]

.

Program Change

Delete

Edit Title Name

A window

f

or entering a title name will appear.

Timer Programming

1/1

THU FEB/09 11:30AMSP (1:00)

Skip Date Start End CH

FEB/10 10:30AM 11:30AM DTV69. 1

New Program

abc

ABC

123

@! ?

FEB/10/12 10:30 AM 69.01 SP

4

)

To enter a Title Name, follow the steps of “Guide to

Edit Title Name” on page 8

8

.

5

)

After entering a Title Name, press [OK

]

.

6

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press [OK

]

.

•

T

he pro

g

ram name is now updated

.

I

nstructions continue on the next pa

g

e

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 49 2013/02/12 21:06:20

5

0

E

N

EN

TIMER RECORDING

I

f the Timer Program did not complete correctly,

th

e Error num

b

er appears in t

h

e Timer

P

rogramming

l

ist

.

Timer Programming

THU FEB/09 11:30AM

Skip Date Start End CH

E41 FEB/10 10:30AM 11:30AM DTV69. 1

New Program

Each error number means:

E1-22

E37-3

9

Recording error other

than

b

elo

w

E

2

4

Unrecordable disc

E

25-2

6

Copy pro

h

i

b

ite

d

program

E2

9

Disc protecte

d

E

30

Di

sc

f

u

ll

E3

5

PCA full *

1

E

3

6

Already finalized

video format disc

E4

0

Some portion has

not

b

een recor

d

e

d

because of program

overlapping.

Recording did not

sta

r

t

at

t

h

e

sta

r

t

im

e.

E4

1

Power faile

d

E4

2

No

d

isc when

recording

E4

3

A

l

rea

d

y 49 tit

l

es

recor

d

e

d

E4

4

Already 254 chapters

recor

d

e

d

E

45 Copy prohibited

p

ro

g

ram

E

46 It is impossible to

recor

d

a

dd

itiona

ll

y

on a

d

isc recor

d

e

d

b

y other units

w

h

en setting

“

Ma

k

e Recor

d

ing

Compati

bl

e” to “OFF”.

E4

7

Alread

y

999 titles

recor

d

e

d

on the HDD

E49 There was no

d

isc

space on the HDD

at t

h

e starting time

for the HDD timer

recording

.

E50 HDD recording is

cancelled due to the

i

nsu

ff

icient disc space

o

n the HDD

.

*1 PCA is a disc's space reserved

f

or recording test

.

• E23, E27, E28, E31, E32, E33 and E34 are not displa

y

ed

.

• A program with the error number is gra

y

ed in the timer

pro

g

rammin

g

list

.

• Timer pro

g

ram with an error number will be cleared

once the entr

y

screen

f

or the program is displa

y

ed

.

p

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 50 2013/02/12 21:06:20

5

1E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

TIMER RECORDING

When the starting time is the same:

A program set previously (PROG. A) has priority.

PROG. A

PROG. B

actual

recording PROG. APROG. B

The rst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut o.

PROG. A

• Timer program which has the earlier start time will be placed first in the timer program list, and be given priority over

the programs with the later start time when timer programs overlap

.

• When timer programs overlap, the

f

irst 2 minutes (at the longest) o

f

the later recording will be cut o

ff

.

• When 2 or more timer programs have the same start time, the program set first will be given priority.

• A timer recording of lower priorit

y

will be cancelled or start from the middle.

• Check the overlapped timer programmings and change the priorit

y

if necessar

y

.

• I

f

there is a power

f

ailure or this unit has been unplugged

f

or more than 1 hour, the clock setting and all timer

pro

g

rammin

g

wi

ll

b

e

l

ost

.

• When recording to a DVD, if a disc is not inserted, the unit will perform the alternate recording to the HDD (refer to

page 48

)

.

• When a timer recording is completed, the unit will ask you whether to turn the unit to the standby mode if there is no

timer recording which starts within 5 minutes, except under conditions listed below.

-

During playback of HDD or DVD

.

-

While displaying menus or information on the screen.

• The unit will be turned to the standb

y

mode automaticall

y

if

y

ou select “Yes” or if

y

ou do not repl

y

in 1 minute.

• When the pro

g

rammed startin

g

and endin

g

time are earlier than the current time, the settin

g

will not be accepted

and be cleared for redoin

g.

• If the starting time is earlier and the ending time is later than the current time, the recording will start right after you

p

ress [OK] at step 8 on page 48

.

• You cannot change the audio language

f

or the timer recording o

f

digital TV broadcasting.

• Timer recordin

g

whose recordin

g

time exceeds 12 hours cannot be made.

• It is prohibited to turn the unit to the standby mode from 4 minutes before the programmed starting time

.

• It is prohibited to change channel from 15 seconds before the programmed starting time.

•

[

REC

]

does not work from 2 minutes before the programmed starting time. If it comes to 2 minutes before the

startin

g

time durin

g

re

g

ular or one-touch timer recordin

g

, the recordin

g

in pro

g

ress will be stopped

.

• Playback o

f

DVD/CD is prohibited

f

rom 2 minutes be

f

ore the programmed starting time when the recording media is

D

VD. If it comes to 2 minutes before the programmed starting time during DVD pla

y

back, the pla

y

back will be

stopped

.

The Priority of Overlapped Setting

s

Note for DVD recordin

g

•

When the recording time o

f

2 programs are overlapped, or

the end time o

f

a program and the start time o

f

another

program is the same, the

f

irst 2 minutes (at the longest) o

f

the subsequent program will be cut o

ff.

•

If the cut-off portion comes up to 3 minute or more, this

program will be displa

y

ed with error number E40 in the

timer pro

g

rammin

g

list.

PROG. A

PROG. B

actual

recording

The rst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut o.

PROG. BPROG. A

When the end time of the programming

currently being recorded and the start time

of the subsequent program are same:

The beginning of the PROG. B may be cut o.

Hints for Timer Recording

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 51 2013/02/12 21:06:21

5

2

E

N

EN

You can overwrite the existing title

f

rom the beginning

.

1

)

P

ress

[

STANDBY/ON

yy

]

.

Ma

k

e sure t

h

at t

h

e TV input is set on t

h

e unit

.

2) Load the disc that includes a title to be overwritten.

It takes a while to display

the title list

.

T

itle list will appear

.

If the title list does not appear, press [TITLE

]

.

3

) Press [REC MODE] repeatedl

y

to select a recording

m

ode.

Refer to “Recordin

g

Mode” on pa

g

e 42.

4) Use [

K

/

L

] to select a title to be overwritten, then

press [OK].

1SP(2Hr)

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

5

)

Use [K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect

“

O

v

e

rwri

te”

, then press

[

OK

]

.

1SP(2Hr)

2

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

Edit

Overwrite

Play

6

) Select the channel you want to record.

(Refer to page 35 on how to select a channel.)

e.g.) DVD+R

W

CH 12

11

+RW

0:00:00

DVD SP(2Hr)

DVD 2h00m

F

I

selected title number

to be overwritten

7)

Press [REC].

Overwriting recording starts.

The elapsed-time counter starts running.

8)

Press [STOP

C

] to stop recording.

Ti

t

l

e

n

a

m

e

i

s

a

l

so

o

v

e

rwri

tte

n

.

This operation may take a

w

hile to be completed

.

You can overwrite the existing title

f

rom the selected

pos

i

t

i

on

.

1) Follow the steps 1, 2 and 4 on the left.

2

) Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “P

l

ay”, t

h

en press [OK].

P

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

start

.

3) Press [PAUSE

F

]

at the point from which you want

to start overwr

i

t

i

ng

.

4) Press [REC].

“

F

I

D

V

D

”, display menu, channel, and the time lapse

will be displayed as illustrated on the left.

5

) Select the channel you want to record.

(Re

f

er to page 35 on how to select a channel.)

6) Press [REC] a

g

ain

.

Overwritin

g

recordin

g

starts.

7)

Press [STOP

C

] to stop recording

.

T

his operation may take a

while to be completed

.

Not

e

• The remaining recording time is displa

y

ed on the

bottom right corner of the TV screen during

overwriting

.

N

ote

• Recording mode o

f

the overwriting title is the same

as that o

f

the original (overwritten) title when

overwriting in the middle o

f

the title

.

• Tit

l

e name wi

ll

not

b

e overwritten

.

SPECIAL RECORDING

Overwriting from the Beginning of the Title Overwriting in the Middle of the Title

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 52 2013/02/12 21:06:21

5

3

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

SPECIAL RECORDING

W

hen you overwrite on the unnecessary title, there were various circumstances such as

f

ollows. Please note that

following cases only describe the overwriting without any recording mode discrepancy. To avoid accidental deletion

p

lease check i

f

there is no important title a

f

ter the overwriting point.

When overwriting title is shorter than the existing title:

(overwriting from the beginning of the title)

overwrite

recording : A

existing title : B

after

overwriting

30 - 180 seconds will be cut o.

When overwriting title is longer than the existing title:

(overwriting from the beginning of the title)

overwrite

recording : A

existing title : B

after

overwriting

When overwriting in the middle of the title:

30 - 180 seconds will be cut o.

overwrite

recording : A

existing title : B

after

overwriting

overwrite

recording : A

existing title : B

existing title : C

after

overwriting

title name : A

title name : B

title name : A

title name : C

title name : B*

title name : B

*Overwritten section and the rest of the sections will

have the same title name as the original existing

title (B).

N

ote

• W

h

en a tit

l

e name is overwritten, its in

d

ex picture is a

l

so overwritten

.

• “Auto Chapter” interval time is reset at the overwriting start point.

• A chapter mark is put at the beginning o

f

the overwrite title when overwriting in the middle o

f

the title.

Hints for Overwriting

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 53 2013/02/12 21:06:21

54

E

N

EN

“High

”

This unit is compatible with the high speed dubbing from

HDD to DVD.

If you dub a title recorded in SLP mode to DVD+R/-R,

d

ubbing speed will be 24 times at the maximum. To

perform the high speed dubbing, set the recording mode

to “High”. Dubbing speed will vary depending on original

recording mode.

• Duration of high speed dubbing will vary depending on

the recordin

g

mode or the title amount.

• High speed dubbing is not available when

;

- recording mode is set to other than “High”

.

- dubbing from a DVD to the HDD

.

- there is not enough space in the disc.

• During dubbing (except for high speed dubbing), you can

u

se

[

C

STOP

]

on the

f

ront panel or press and hold

[

STOP

C

]

for 2 seconds on the remote control, and an

y

other buttons

will

be

inv

a

li

d.

“

Auto

”

When “Auto” is selected as a recordin

g

mode, the unit

ca

l

cu

l

ates

h

o

w m

uc

h

t

im

e

i

s

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

o

n

t

h

e

d

i

sc

a

n

d

selects the best recording mode available automaticall

y.

• The recording ma

y

be cut short when the available

recording space of the disc is too limited.

Note on

d

u

bb

ing

• During normal dubbing,

y

ou can watch the pla

y

bac

k

picture of the title being dubbed (the audio cannot

be changed). During high speed dubbing, however,

the pla

y

back picture will not appear

.

• Dubbing o

f

a “copy-once only” program is not

possible with this unit

.

• I

f

you stop the dubbing hal

f

way, the contents will be

d

ubbed up to the point where you stop the dubbing

(except for the high speed dubbing). With high

speed dubbing, nothing will be dubbed i

f

you stop it

hal

f

way

.

• To stop the dubbin

g

in pro

g

ress, press

[

C

S

TOP

]

o

n

the front panel or press and hold

[

STOP

C

]

f

o

r 2

seco

n

ds

o

n

t

h

e

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l

.

•

To dub from a finalized DVD to HDD, please refer

to “One-touch Dubbin

g

...” on pa

g

e 62.

Guide to Dubbing Menu Displa

y

You can dub the contents of the HDD to DVD or vice versa. Before you start dubbing, refer to pages 41-43 to see the

recor

d

ing compati

b

i

l

ity

.

Recordin

g

Mode for Dubbin

g

DUBBING

HDD DVD

1/1

3000 MB

Add

Delete All

Dubbing Start

ABCDE

HQ (1Hr) (0:30:00) JAN/ 9/2012

Dubbing List

1.ABCDE

2.JAN/ 9/12 1:00AM CH22

3.JAN/12/12 11:00AM CH96

2

1

3

4

5

6

1

Du

bb

ing

d

irection

2 Selected title information

3 Dubbing menu

4 Remaining recordable spac

e

5 Dubbin

g

list

6 Current page number / total number of page

s

Ot

h

e

r m

odes

Re

f

er to page 42

f

or the in

f

ormation on other modes

.

Information on Dubbing

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 54 2013/02/12 21:06:21

55

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Connect t

h

e externa

l

d

evice proper

l

y to t

h

e unit

b

y using eit

h

er L2 an

d

L3 (Front) or L1 (Rear) input jac

k

s.

W

hen connecting an external device of monaural output to this unit, use AUDIO L

j

ack of L2 (Front) or L1 (Rear).

U

se S-Video or the RCA audio

/

video cables

f

or this connection

.

W

hen connecting a DVC (digital video camcorder), use DV-IN jack o

f

L3 (Front).

external device

(camcorder, VCR etc.)

VIDEO

IN

L

R

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

L

R

front of this unit

rear of this unit

AUDIO OUT

LR

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

S

-VIDE

O

UT

L2

or

L1

RCA video cable

RCA audio cable

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

ANTENNA

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

Connecting to an External Device

Using the RCA cables

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

ANTENNA

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

RCA audio cable

external device

(camcorder, VCR etc.)

VIDEO

IN

S-VIDEO

IN

L

R

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

IN

L

R

front of this unit

rear of this unit

AUDIO OUT

LR

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDE

O

U

T

V

IDEO

VIDEO

IN

L2

L1

RCA audio cable

S-Video cable

or

Connecting to an External Device

Using an S-Video cable

DUBBING

Setting for an External Device

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 55 2013/02/12 21:06:21

56

E

N

DUBBING

1

Press

[

MENU

]

and use

[

K

/

L

]

to select

“General Settin

g

”, then press [OK]

.

“General Setting” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Vi

d

eo”, t

h

en

press [OK]

.

Su

b

menu wi

ll

appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Video Input”,

then press [OK].

4

Use [

K

/

L

] to select desired external

input, then press [OK].

Video Input

L1 (Rear)

L2 (Front)

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the input

j

ac

k

ty

pe to connect, then press [OK].

I

f

you want to use VIDEO IN, select “Video In”

.

If you want to use S-VIDEO IN, select

“

S

-Vi

deo

In”

.

L1 (Rear)

Video In

S-Video In

Press [MENU] to exit.

AUDIO OUT DV-OUT

LR

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

external device

(camcorder, VCR etc.) front of this unit

V

IDE

O

UT

S

-VIDE

O

U

T

RCA audio cable

DV cable (4-pin)

L3

Connecting to an External Device

Using a DV cable

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

N

ot

e

• Please contact the external device manufacturer i

f

y

ou have an

y

problem with it.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 56 2013/02/12 21:06:22

5

7E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

DUBBING

If

y

ou are recording to the HDD, press

[

HDD

]

first

,

then

procee

d

to step 2.

If you are recording to a disc, press

[

DVD

]

first

.

1

Insert a recordable disc (refer to page

27 on how to insert a disc)

.

It may take a while to load the disc

d

ata after the disc tray closes.

2

Select the appropriate external input

channel (L1, L2 or L3) by pressing

[SOURCE] or [CHANNEL

/

]

.

• If the external device is connected to the rear

o

f this unit, select L1.

• If

t

h

e

x

te

rn

a

l

de

vi

ce

i

s

co

nn

ected

to

t

h

e

fr

o

n

t

o

f this unit, select L2 or L3.

• If

y

ou are connecting the digital video

c

amcorder to the DV-IN input of this unit, refer

t

o pages 58-60

.

• You can a

l

so se

l

ect L1 or L2 c

h

anne

l

b

y using

[

the Number buttons

]

.

e

.g.) For L1, press

[

0

]

,

[

0

]

,

[

1

]

.

F

or

L

2, press

[

0

]

,

[

0

]

,

[

2

]

.

For L3, press

[

0

]

,

[

0

]

,

[

3

]

.

3

Press [REC MODE] repeate

dl

y to

se

l

ect a recor

d

ing mo

d

e

.

Re

f

er to “Recording Mode” on page 42.

4

Press

[

I

R

ECORD] on the unit to start

recordin

g.

5

Start p

l

a

yb

ac

k

on t

h

e externa

l

d

evice

to record

f

rom.

6

Press

[

C

S

TOP] on the unit to stop

recordin

g.

This operation may take a

while to be completed

.

Be

f

ore recording

f

rom an external device, re

f

er to the instructions

f

or the connection on page 55.

6

4

1

Recording from an External Device

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 57 2013/02/12 21:06:22

5

8

E

N

EN

DUBBING

Gui

d

e to DV an

d

On-Screen Disp

l

a

y

T

his

f

unction helps

y

ou to easil

y

dub the contents o

f

the DVC

(

Di

g

ita

l

Vi

d

eo Camcor

d

er

)

to

H

DD

o

r

D

V

D.

You can control basic operations o

f

the DVC

f

rom the remote control o

f

this unit such as playback,

f

ast

f

orward or

reverse and stop all operations if the DVC is in video mode. Use the DV cable that has 4-pin input jack and is

c

ompliance with the IEEE1394 standards. When you connect to DV-IN jack on the front of this unit, select “L3(DV-IN)”

position by using

[

SOURCE

]

or

[

CHANNEL

/

]

on the remote control and press

[

DISPLAY

]

to show the DV dubbin

g

information for the operation of your DVC

.

1. DV ico

n

2. Indicator o

f

active device

• When “Control” is highlighted,

p

ress

[

OK

]

to display the item

s

election. Use

[

K

/

L

]

t

o select the

device

y

ou wish to operate, then

press

[

OK

]

to

act

iv

ate.

• Select “HDD” / “DVD” to control

this unit.

• Select “DV Input” to control your

DV

C.

3

. Recordin

g

audio mode

• Wit

h

DVC in stop mo

d

e w

h

i

l

e

ot

h

er sources are avai

l

a

bl

e, t

h

en

“DV A

ud

i

o

”

ca

n

be

se

l

ected.

Pr

ess

[

OK

]

to display the item selection

an

d

then use

[

K

/

L

]

to select the

audio you wish to output. Press

[

OK

]

a

g

ain to activate.

• Select “Stereo1” to dub the stereo

soun

d.

• Select “Stereo2” to dub the sound

with after recording sound

.

• Select “Mix” to

d

u

b

the stereo1

a

n

d

ste

r

eo

2

.

4. Indicator of dubbing functio

n

• When the unit is ready

f

or

d

u

bb

ing, “Start Rec” wi

ll

appear

.

• When the unit is dubbin

g

, “Pause

Rec” will a

pp

ear

.

5. Channel positio

n

• W

h

en you se

l

ect “L3(DV-IN)”

b

y

us

i

ng

[

SOURCE

]

or

[

CHANNEL

/

]

,

“L3

(

DV-IN

)

”

will appear.

L3 (DV-IN)

AB-1234

0:12:34

1/ 1 1/ 1

+

RW

Control DVD

DV Audio Stereo1

Start Rec

L3 (DV-IN)

AB-1234

0:12:34

1/ 1 1/ 1

+

RW

DVD SP(2Hr) 1h00m DVD SP(2Hr) 1h00m

2

3

1

4

5

67

what mode of DVC

.

S

witch the mo

d

e on the DVC to

playback mode for the dubbing

information.

Wh

e

n

t

h

e

DV

C

i

s

in vi

deo

m

ode...

Wh

e

n

t

h

e

DV

C

i

s

n

ot

i

n

ca

m

e

r

a

m

ode...

6. Product name of your DV

C

• I

f

the unit cannot recognize the

input signal

f

rom the DVC or the

un

k

nown pro

d

uct, “No Device” or

“****” wi

ll

appear instea

d

.

7. Status of the current operation

a

n

d

t

h

e

t

im

e

cou

n

ter

T

he

f

ollowing instructions are described with the operations using the remote control o

f

this unit.

Information on DV Dubbing

DVC is in stop mode

.

DVC is in playback mode

.

DVC is in

p

ause mode

.

DVC is fast forwarding.

(

standard speed

)

DVC is fast forwarding.

(

faster than above)

DVC is fast forwarding.

(

faster than above

)

DVC is slow

f

orwarding.

(

stan

d

ar

d

spee

d)

DVC is slow forwarding.

(

faster than above)

DVC is slow forwarding.

(

faster than above

)

DVC is fast forwarding.

(

in stop mode)

DVC is fast reversing.

(

in stop mode)

DVC is

f

ast reversing.

(

stan

d

ar

d

spee

d

)

DVC is fast reversing.

(

faster than above

)

DVC is fast reversin

g

.

(

faster than above

)

DVC is in slow reverse

p

layback

.

DVC is recordin

g.

DVC is in recording pause

m

o

d

e

.

Each icon means (Available icons may vary depending on the DVC):

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 58 2013/02/12 21:06:23

59E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

DUBBING

Preparing for DV dubbing (DVC to HDD)

:

• Make sure your DVC is in video mode.

Preparing for DV dubbing (DVC to DVD)

:

• Insert a recordable DVD

.

• Ma

k

e sure your DVC is in vi

d

eo mo

d

e.

If you are recording to the HDD, press

[

HDD

]

first.

If

y

ou are recording to a disc, press

[

DVD

]

first

.

1

Use

[

SOURCE

]

or

[

CHANNEL /

]

to

select “L3(DV-IN)”

.

AB-1234

0:00:00

L3 (DV-IN)

2

Press [REC MODE] repeate

dl

y to

se

l

ect a recor

d

in

g

mo

d

e

.

(Re

f

er to page 42.)

3

Press

[

DISPLAY

].

4

Press [OK] to displa

y

the item

selection. Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select

“DV In

p

ut”, then

p

ress [OK]

.

L3 (DV-IN)

AB-1234

0:12:34

1/ 1 1/ 1

+

RW

DVD

DV Input

DVD HQ(1Hr) 1h00m

5

Press

[

PLAY

B

]

to find where

y

ou

wish to start dubbing. Then, press

[

STOP

C

]

where

y

ou wish to start

dubbin

g.

Be

f

ore recording

f

rom DVC, see page 55

f

or connection instructions

.

DVC to HDD / DVD Dubbing

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 59 2013/02/12 21:06:23

60

E

N

EN

Note for DV dubbing

• If you press

[

PAUSE F

]

at step 5, the tape will rewind to the point a few seconds precedin

g

the paused point.

W

hen you press [OK] at step 6, then, it will start dubbing when it comes to the paused point.

• The unit does not send out the output signal to DVC

.

• For the proper operation, connect DVC to the unit directly. Do not connect this unit and DVC via any other unit.

• D

o

n

ot

co

nn

ect

m

o

r

e

t

h

a

n 1 DV

C.

• The unit can onl

y

accept DVC. Other DV device such as cable/satellite box or D-VHS VCR cannot be recognized.

• I

f

no video signal is detected

f

rom the DVC during DVC to HDD or DVD dubbing, the recording will be paused and

“

I

” will

f

lash on the TV screen. The recording will resume when the unit detects the video signal again.

• When the DVC is in camera mode, refer to “Guide to DV and On-Screen Displa

y

” on page 58.

• Date / time an

d

cassette memory

d

ata wi

ll

not

b

e recor

d

e

d.

• Pictures with a copy-guard signal cannot be recorded.

• A DV terminal is a terminal that can use the transmission mode conformin

g

to the IEEE 1394 standards called “Fire

W

ire”. It serves as the interface that connects the PC and peripheral device such as “i.LINK” (re

g

istered trademar

k

of SONY). It enables di

g

ital dubbin

g

between DV devices with little de

g

radation

.

• Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

dub

fr

o

m DV

C

to

bot

h HDD

a

n

d

DVD

at

t

h

e

sa

m

e

t

im

e.

• Please contact the DVC manu

f

acturer i

f

you have any problem with it

.

DUBBING

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Start Rec”, then

press

[

OK

].

The dubbing will start

.

7

To stop dubbin

g

;

A) Press [

C

STOP] on the unit. o

r

B) Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Control”,

then press [OK].

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “HDD” /

“DVD”, then press [OK]

.

Then press [STOP

C

].

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 60 2013/02/12 21:06:23

6

1E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Preparing

f

or dubbing (HDD to DVD)

:

• Insert a recor

d

a

bl

e DVD

.

Preparing for dubbing (DVD to HDD)

:

• Insert a disc to be dubbed

.

1

Press [MENU] in stop mode.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Dubbing”, then

press [OK].

Menu

Timer Programming

Title List

Disc Edit

HDD Menu

General Setting

Dubbing

3

HDD to DVD

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “HDD DVD”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

DVD to HDD

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “DVD HDD”

,

then press [OK]

.

e.g.) HDD

➔

D

V

D

HDD DVD

DVD HDD

Dubbing

4

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Add”, then press

[

OK

]

.

HDD DVD

1/1

3000 MB

Dubbing List

Add

Delete All

Dubbing Start

• If you have registered any dubbing before,

t

hey will be listed in the dubbing list.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

] to select a desired

title, then press [OK]

.

At the u

pp

er left of each title, the number will

appear in the order o

f

selectio

n

.

DUBBING

Selected Title Dubbing

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 61 2013/02/12 21:06:23

62

E

N

EN

6

Repeat step 5 unti

l

you register a

ll

t

h

e tit

l

es to

b

e

d

u

bb

e

d

, t

h

en press

[

DUBBING

].

e.g.

)

HDD

Title List

1 / 6

ABCDE

12:00AM (10:00:00) FRI JAN/ 6/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

2 5 4

1 3

Press ‘DUBBING’ to confirm.

T

h

e tit

l

es are now registere

d

in t

h

e

d

u

bb

ing

l

ist.

When you go back to the title list to add another

title, titles already registered are shown with a

check mark.

T

o

de

l

ete

a

t

i

t

l

e:

1 Go to the Dubbing List, then use

[

K

/

L

]

to

select a title. Then press

[

OK

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Delete”, then press

[

OK

]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

To move a title:

1

Go to the Dubbing List, then use

[

K

/

L

]

to

select a title. Then press

[

OK

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Move”, then press

[

OK

]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a desired insert point,

then press

[

OK

]

.

To erase all the titles in the dubbing title list:

1

U

se

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Delete All” in the

Dubbing Menu, then press

[

OK

]

.

2

U

se

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Yes”, then press

[

OK

]

.

• To go back and forth between dubbing menu

and dubbing list, use

[

s

/

B

]

.

7

After adding all the titles

y

ou want

,

use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Dubbing Start”

in the Dubbin

g

Menu, then press

[

OK

].

8

Use

[

s

/

B

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

recor

d

ing mo

d

e, t

h

en press [OK].

e.g.) HDD

➡

D

V

D

HDD DVD

3000 MB

500 MBDubbing Titles

Please select REC MODE.

LP EP SLP AutoHigh HQ SP SPP

Confirmation messa

g

e will appear

.

• Depen

d

ing on t

h

e

d

u

bb

ing

d

irection, t

h

e

avai

l

a

bl

e recor

d

ing mo

d

e varies.

• When dubbing from HDD to DVD, you can

select “Hi

g

h” to perform the hi

g

h speed

d

ubbin

g

(refer to “Recordin

g

Mode for

D

ubbing” on page 54 for more details)

.

9

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press

[

OK

]

.

Start Dubbing?

Yes

No

Du

bb

ing wi

ll

start

.

• It ma

y

take awhile to prepare for the dubbing

.

To stop t

h

e

d

u

bb

ing in progress

:

Pr

ess

[

C

STOP

]

on the front

p

anel.

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

[

STOP

C

]

f

o

r 2

seco

n

ds

o

n

t

h

e

remote control

.

When you are dubbing

f

rom HDD to DVD, the

con

f

irmation message will appear, then select

“Yes”

.

DUBBING

One-touc

h

Du

bb

ing...

With one-touch dubbing, you can start dubbing right

away with just one touch.

T

o

dub

t

h

e

co

n

te

n

ts

in

a

DVD whi

c

h i

s

fin

a

liz

ed

o

n

other unit

,

use this function

.

During playback of the title you want to dub, press

[

DUBBING

].

If you are playing back a DVD, DVD to HDD dubbing will

start right away.

If you are playing back HDD, HDD to DVD dubbing will

start right away

.

• The dubbing will start from the beginning of the title

b

eing played back.

• T

h

e unit wi

ll

d

u

b

on

l

y t

h

e tit

l

e

b

eing p

l

aye

d

b

ac

k.

• When dubbing from HDD to DVD, recording mode will

automatically be set to “High” whenever the conditions

are met

(

refer to

pa

g

e 5

4

). Otherwise

,

the last selected

recording mode will automatically be applied

.

To stop the dubbing in progress

:

P

res

s

[

C

S

TOP

]

on the

f

ront panel.

Press and hold [STOP

C

]

for 2 seconds on the remote

co

n

t

r

o

l

.

When you are dubbing from HDD to DVD, the

con

f

irmation message will appear, then select “Yes”

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 62 2013/02/12 21:06:23

63

E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Preparing

f

or dubbing

:

• Insert a recor

d

a

bl

e DVD

.

Press [HDD] first.

1

Press

[

TITLE

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

]

to select a desired

title to dub, then press [OK].

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Dubbing”, then

p

ress [OK].

Resume Playback

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Delete Multiple Titles

Dubbing

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

Start Dubbing?

Yes

No

Dubbing of the selected title will start.

To stop the dubbin

g

in pro

g

ress

:

Pr

ess

[

C

STOP

]

on the front

p

anel.

Press and hold

[

STOP

C

]

f

or 2 seconds on the

remote control

.

DUBBING

This

f

unction lets you select one speci

f

ic title

f

rom the title list

f

or dubbing

.

One Title Dubbing (HDD to DVD only)

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 63 2013/02/12 21:06:23

64

E

N

EN

PROTECTING A DISC

1

Press

[

MENU

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Disc Edit”

,

then

p

ress [OK]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Disc Protect OFF

ON”, then press [OK].

e.g.) DVD+RW

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Make Edits Compatible

Disc Protect OFF ON

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

Protect this disc?

Yes

No

T

h

e

d

isc is now protecte

d.

This operation ma

y

take a

w

hile to be com

p

leted

.

T

o prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the titles, you can protect them from the “Disc Edit” menu

.

N

ot

e

T

o cance

l

t

h

e

d

isc protection

:

•

When

y

ou insert a disc protected with this unit,

“Di

sc

Pr

otect

O

N OFF” will appear instead of “OFF

ON

”

at step 3

.

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Make Edits Compatible

Disc Protect ON OFF

To release the

p

rotection for the disc, select “Disc

Pr

otect

O

N OFF” at step 3, then follow rest of the

procedures.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 64 2013/02/12 21:06:24

6

5E

N

EN

Recording

Basic SetupConnections Playback EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

PLAYING THE DISCS ON OTHER DVD PLAYERS

1

Press

[

MENU

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Disc E

d

it”, t

h

en

press

[

OK

]

.

“Disc Edit” menu will appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Finalize”, then

press [OK].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press

[

OK

]

.

Finalize disc?

Yes

No

Finalizin

g

will start

.

Finalizing 90%

To cancel finalizing..

.

(DVD-RW on

l

y)

• To cancel finalizin

g

at step 4, press

[

STOP

C

]

,

select

“Y

es

” wi

t

h

[

K

/

L

]

,

then

p

ress

[

OK

]

. Finalizin

g

is

c

ancelled and the unit will be in sto

p

mode.

Finalizing 5%

Yes

No

Do you want to cancel ?

• I

f

appears w

h

en pressing

[

STOP

C

]

,

you canno

t

c

ancel

f

inalizing because the

f

inalizing has been in

c

erta

i

n progress

.

• When selectin

g

“No” and pressin

g

[

OK

]

o

r

[

RETURN

]

,

f

inalizin

g

will be continued

.

• You cannot cancel finalizin

g

a DVD+R/DVD-R disc

o

nce it has started

.

This operation may take a

while to be completed

.

5

Fina

l

izing is comp

l

ete

d

.

Press

[

S

T

O

P

C

]

to exit.

You will need to

f

inalize DVD+R, DVD-RW or DVD-R to play them back on other DVD players

.

Finalizing may take several minutes up to an hour.

A

shorter recording period on the disc will require a longer time period for finalization. Do not unplug the power cord

during finalization

.

N

ot

e

• Once

y

ou started finalization, no controls are

available. You cannot cancel or stop the finalizing

m

ode.

Pl

ease

w

a

i

t

u

n

t

il i

t

fini

s

h

es

t

h

e

fin

a

liz

at

i

o

n

p

rocess

.

• There is no need to finalize DVD+RW

.

• When you insert a DVD-RW finalized with this unit,

“

Undo Finalize” will appear instead o

f

“Finalize”

.

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Undo Finalize

Disc Protect ON OFF

To release the finalizin

g

for the disc, select “Undo

F

inalize” at step 3

.

* DO NOT turn the power o

ff

or place unit in standby

mode during finalization, this will result in a

malfunction

.

Finalizing a Disc

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 65 2013/02/12 21:06:24

66

E

N

EN

PLAYING THE DISCS ON OTHER DVD PLAYERS

1

Press

[

MENU

]

and use

[

K

/

L

]

to select

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

“General Setting” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Recor

d

ing”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

“Recording” menu will appear.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Auto Finalize”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Disc Full” or

“End of Timer Rec”, then

p

ress [OK].

Auto Finalize

Disc Full

End of Timer Rec

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “ON”, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

e.g.) “Disc Fu

ll

”

Disc Full

ON

OFF

Your setting will be activated

.

6

Press [MENU] to exit.

You can

f

inalize discs automaticall

y

using this

f

unction. You can use this

f

unction to

f

inalize discs a

f

ter

f

inishing timer

recordin

g

s and at the end o

f

the disc space

.

N

ot

e

• This function is not available after finishing a daily or

w

eekl

y

Program Recording

.

Auto Finalizing

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 66 2013/02/12 21:06:24

6

7E

N

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Note

•

T

h

is unit may not

b

e a

bl

e to p

l

ay

b

ac

k

d

iscs recor

d

e

d

o

n PC’s or other recor

d

ers

.

INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK

Be

f

ore you play back a DVD, read the

f

ollowing in

f

ormation

.

T

his unit is compatible to play back the

f

ollowing discs

.

T

o p

l

ay

b

ac

k

a DVD, ma

k

e sure t

h

at it meets t

h

e

requirements

f

or region codes and color systems as

d

escribed below. You can play back discs that have the

following logos. Other disc types are not guaranteed to

play back.

Playable Discs and Files

D

VD is recorded in di

ff

erent color systems throughout

the world. The most common color s

y

stem is NTSC

(which is used primarily in the United States and Canada)

.

T

his unit uses NTSC, so a DVD

y

ou pla

y

back must be

r

ecorded in the NTSC system. You cannot play back a

D

VD recorded in other color s

y

stems

.

Color Systems

This unit has been designed to play back a DVD

with region 1. A DVD must be labeled

f

or ALL

r

egions or

f

or region 1 in order to play back on

t

h

e unit. You cannot p

l

ay

b

ac

k

DVDs t

h

at are

l

abeled

f

or other regions. Look

f

or the symbols

on the right on your DVD. I

f

these region

symbols do not appear on your DVD, you cannot

pl

ay

b

ac

k

t

h

e DVD in t

h

is unit

.

The number inside the globe refers to region of the

w

o

rl

d.

A DVD labeled for a specific region can only play back on

the unit with the same region code.

Re

g

ion Codes

LogosPlayable discs

MediaPlayable les

DVD+RW/+R

DVD-RW/-R

CD-RW/-R

JPEG

CD-DA (audio CD)

video CD

CD-RW

CD-R

DVD-video

DVD+RW

DVD+R

DVD-RW

(Finalized video mode discs only)

DVD-R

(Finalized video mode discs only)

KODAK Picture CD

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

The following discs will not play back on this unit.

• CD-ROM • Com

p

act Disc-Interactive

(

CD-I

)

• DVD-RAM • Video Sin

g

le Disc (VSD)

• DVD-ROM • DVD-au

d

io

•

U

nfin

a

liz

ed

d

i

sc

•

DVD or CD contains MP3/Windows Media™ Audio/DivX® file

s

• DVD-R or DVD-RW recorded in VR mode or non

compatible recording format

• Blu-ray Disc • HD DV

D

• Super Video CD

On the following disc, the sound may not be heard

.

• Super Audio CD - Only the sound on the CD layer can be

heard. The sound on the high-density super audio CD

layer cannot be heard.

Unplayable Discs

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 67 2013/02/12 21:06:24

68

E

N

EN

You can select images or information on the menu

screen by activating the PBC (playback control) function

of

the video CD

.

T

his unit con

f

orms to ver.1.1 and ver. 2.0 o

f

video CD

s

tandard with PBC

f

unction

.

V

er.1.1 (without PBC function): You can enjoy playbac

k

p

icture as well as music CD

.

V

er.2.0 (with PBC function): While using a video CD with

PBC function, “PBC” appears on the TV screen

.

Not

e

• PBC setting turns to “ON” when loading video CD

with PBC function, thus, even after setting PBC to

“

OFF” and ejecting the video CD then reloading the

video CD, this setting turns to “ON” automatically

.

• Some operations cannot be performed while PBC

f

unction is on. Cancel PBC function temporarily to

perform those operations by following the

i

nstruction

b

elow

.

1)

Press [MENU]

.

2

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “DISC Playback Mode”, then

p

ress [OK].

“DISC Playback Mode” menu will appear

.

3

)

Use [K

/

L] to select “PBC (Video CD onl

y

)”, then

p

ress [OK]

.

4

)

Use [K / L] to se

l

ect “ON” or “OFF”, t

h

en press [OK].

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d

.

You can pla

y

back interactive software using menu

screens. Re

f

er to instructions in the video CD.

PBC (pla

y

back control)

f

or Video C

D

T

he contents of HDD / DVD are generally divided into

titles. Titles may be further subdivided into chapters

.

Hint

f

or HDD / DVD Pla

y

bac

k

HDD / DVD

titl 1

title

1

titl 2

title

2

cha

p

ter

1

c

ha

p

ter 2 cha

p

ter

1

c

ha

p

ter 2

c

ha

p

ter 3

audio CD, video CD

t

r

ac

k 1

t

r

ac

k 2

t

r

ac

k

3

t

r

ac

k 4

t

r

ac

k

5

JPEG

fld 1

f

o

ld

er

1

fld 2

f

o

ld

er

2

f

ile

1

file 2 file 3 file

4

file 5

INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 68 2013/02/12 21:06:24

6

9E

N

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

BASIC PLAYBACK

I

f

you are playing back the titles in HDD, press

[

HDD

]

first, then proceed to step 2

.

If

y

ou are pla

y

ing back the titles in DVD, press

[

DVD

]

fir

st.

1

Insert a disc (refer to page 27 on how

to insert a disc).

Align the disc to

the disc tray guide.

* Make sure the disc is compatible with this unit.

(Refer to pa

g

e 67 for the list of compatible discs.)

It may take a while to load the disc data

af

ter the disc tray closes

.

2

Press

[

PLAY

B

]

to start p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

If

y

ou are pla

y

ing back a DVD-video or video CD

with PBC function, a menu ma

y

appear.

Re

f

er to “Using the Title / Disc Menu” on page 73.

3

Press

[

STOP

C

]

once to stop pla

y

back

temporaril

y.

• Refer to “Resume Pla

y

back” on page 74.

N

ote

• Some discs may start playback automatically.

• You can select images or information on the menu

screen by activating PBC (playback control) function

(

page 68

)

.

• If you insert a disc when the unit is in HDD mode,

playback will start automatically when you press

[

DVD

]

.

Direct Playback

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 69 2013/02/12 21:06:25

70

E

N

EN

BASIC PLAYBACK

If

y

ou are pla

y

ing back the titles in HDD, press

[

HDD

]

f

irst, then

p

roceed to ste

p

2.

I

f

y

ou are pla

y

ing back the titles in DVD, press

[

DVD

]

f

ir

st.

1

Insert a disc (refer to page 27 on how

to insert a disc).

*

Make sure the disc is compatible with this unit.

(

Refer to page

67

for the list of compatible discs.

)

It may take a while to load the disc data

after the disc tray closes.

2

For HDD,

p

ress [TITLE] to call u

p

the

tit

l

e

l

ist. For DVD, t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist wi

ll

automatically appear when you

insert a disc. Otherwise,

p

ress [TITLE]

or

[

DISC MENU

]

.

• To exit t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist, press

[

STOP

C

]

.

• To resume the title list, press

[

TITLE

]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

title, then press [OK].

<HDD

t

i

t

l

e

li

st

>

Title List

1 / 6

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 SP

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

1SP(2Hr)

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

• For video CD, when “PBC (Video CD onl

y

)” in

t

he “DISC pla

y

back Mode” menu is set to “ON”,

t

he video CD main menu will appear when

i

nsertin

g

a disc. In such case, select a

n

umbered menu with [the Number buttons

]

.

• Press

[

G

]

(for HDD)

/

[

B

]

(for DVD) to display

t

he next page, and press

[

H

]

(for HDD) /

[

{

]

(f

or DVD ) to display the previous page.

N

ot

e

• Some discs may start playback automatically

.

• You can also start playback by pressing [PLAY

B

]

in

stead

o

f [OK

]

at ste

p

3

.

Playback from the Title List

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 70 2013/02/12 21:06:25

71

E

N

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Play” (

f

or DVD),

or se

l

ect “Resume P

l

ay

b

ac

k

” or “P

l

ay

from Start” (for HDD), then press [OK]

.

e.

g

.) DV

D

1SP(2Hr)

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

Edit

Overwrite

Play

Playback will start

.

5

Press

[

STOP

C

]

once to stop p

l

ay

b

ac

k

temporarily

.

• Refer to “Resume Playback” on page 74

.

N

ote

fo

r DVD

t

i

t

l

e

li

st

If

you want to see disc in

f

ormation, press

[

{

]

{

when the

f

irst page of the title list is displayed or press

[

K

]

w

h

en

the

f

irst title is selected but not when “Play”, “Edit” or

“

Overwrite” is

h

ig

hl

ig

h

te

d.

e

.g.) DVD+RW

No Disc Name

Disc DVD+RW

Total Titles 3

Disc Space Used 0:30:48

Disc Protect OFF

Make Edits Compatible Needed

e

.g.) DVD+R

No Disc Name

Disc DVD+R

Total Titles 5

Disc Space Used 1:30:48

Disc Protect OFF

Finalize Finalized

1

.

Di

sc

n

a

m

e

(

Default “No Disc Name”

)

2. Disc t

y

pe

(

DVD+RW/DVD+R/ DVD-RW/DVD-R

)

3. Total number of titl

e

(

inc

l

u

d

e “EMPTY SPACE”

)

4

. Total time of recorded disc spac

e

5. Status of disc protectio

n

(“ON” is protected disc.

)

6

. Making edits compatible/finaliz

e

•

Wh

e

n DVD+RW i

s

in

se

r

ted:

If the disc needs to be set “Make Edits Com

p

atible”,

“Needed” is displa

y

ed. Otherwise, “Not Needed” is

displa

y

ed. (Refer to page 100.

)

•

When DVD+R, DVD-RW or DVD-R is inserted:

I

f

“Finalize” is done, “Finalized” is displa

y

ed.

Otherwise, “Unfinalized” is displayed

.

BASIC PLAYBACK

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 71 2013/02/12 21:06:25

72

E

N

EN

BASIC PLAYBACK

N

ot

e

•

Fi

l

es w

h

ose extension is ot

h

er t

h

an “.jpg / .jpeg(JPEG)”

will not

b

e liste

d.

•

Some unplayable folders or files may be listed due to

the recordin

g

status

.

•

High-resolution JPEG files take longer to be displayed

.

•

Progressive JPEG files (JPEG files saved in progressive

format) cannot be played back on this unit.

Press [DVD] first.

1

Insert a playable disc (refer to page 27

on how to insert a disc)

.

* Make sure the disc is compatible with this unit.

(Refer to page 6

7

for the list of compatible discs.)

It may take a while to load the disc data

after the disc tray closes

.

When an audio CD is inserted, the track list will

appear.

When a disc with JPEG files is inserted, the file

list will appear

.

• To exit the track/

f

ile list, press [STOP

C

]

.

• To resume the track/file list, press

[

TITLE

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired folder

or track/file, then press [OK]

.

e.

g

.) File lis

t

File List

DISC NAME

1/ 2

Folder1

Folder2

JPEG file1

JPEG file2

JPEG file3

JPEG file4

JPEG file5

JPEG file6

When selecting track/file:

Playback will start

.

When selecting the

f

older (Not available

f

or audio CD)

:

The files in the folder will a

pp

ear.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select the file or folder

y

ou want to pla

y

back, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

• Press

[

PLAY

B

]

,

[

OK

]

o

r

[

B

]

to move to any lower

h

ierarchies

.

• Pr

ess

[

s

]

o

r

[

RETURN

]

to move back to the previous

hierarch

y.

Hints for audio CD tracks and JPEG files

:

• Folders are shown b

y

.

• Audio CD tracks are shown b

y

.

• JPEG

f

iles are shown by

.

• The system can recognize up to 255 folders, up to 99

tracks

/

999 files

.

• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space

will be displayed as “...”. Unrecognizable characters will

be replaced with asterisks

.

• I

f

there are no

f

iles in the

f

older, “No Files” will be displayed

.

It is recommended that files to be played back in this

u

nit are recorded under the followin

g

specifications

:

<JPE

G>

• Upper limit : 6,300 x 5,100 dots.

• L

o

w

e

r limi

t

:

3

2 x

3

2

dots.

• File size o

f

image maximum : 12 MB.

Playing Audio Discs and Picture Discs

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 72 2013/02/12 21:06:25

73

E

N

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

BASIC PLAYBACK

D

VD or video CD with PBC function ma

y

contain a title

l

ist

,

which describes the contents of the disc

,

or a disc

m

enu, which guides you through the available functions

in t

h

e

d

isc

.

Press [DVD] first

.

1) Insert a disc (refer to page 27 on how to insert a disc).

* Make sure the disc is compatible with this unit. (Refer

to

p

age 67

for the list of compatible discs.)

It may take a while to load the disc

d

ata after the disc tray closes

.

2) Press [TITLE] or [DISC MENU] to call up the title list

or disc menu.

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

] to make a selection, and then

press [OK] to enable

y

our selection

.

4

)

Press [

S

T

O

P

C

] to ex

i

t.

1) During pla

y

back, press [PAUSE

F

]

.

Pla

y

back will be paused.

F

2

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to t

h

e norma

l

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

N

ote

• You can se

l

ect a num

b

ere

d

menu wit

h

[t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

a

l

so.

• Menus var

y

among discs. Refer to the information

accompan

y

ing the disc for details

.

•

[

TITLE

]

o

r

[

DISC MENU

]

will not always be active

wit

h

a

ll

DVD

.

• For vi

d

eo CD, w

h

en “PBC (Vi

d

eo CD on

l

y)” in “DISC

Playback Mode” menu is “ON”, the video CD main

menu wi

ll

appear w

h

en inserting a

d

isc.

N

ot

e

• On DVD, set “Sti

ll

Mo

d

e” to “Fie

ld

” in “P

l

ay

b

ac

k

”

menu i

f

pictures in pause mode are blurred. (Re

f

er to

page 108.

)

KO

DAK P

ictu

r

e

CD

T

he Picture CD is a service to convert photographs taken

b

y

a conventional film camera into digital data and write

the data on a CD. You can enjo

y

picture images on the TV

set

b

y p

l

aying

b

ac

k

t

h

e Picture CDs

.

For details of KODAK Picture CD, contact a shop that

provides developing service of Kodak Inc.

1

) Press [TITLE]

.

Picture CD

1 / 2

4 5 6

12 3

Image 1

• To exit t

h

e Picture CD t

h

um

b

nai

l

List, press

[

RETUR

N

]

or

[

STOP

C

]

.

Arrow icons mean the title list inclu

d

es a next or

ous page. Use

[

{

/

B

]

in the direction of the

icon you wish to

f

ollow. You can also quick review the

six thumbnails at once between the first and last

pages by pressing

[

H

]

/

[

G

]

.

2)

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

trac

k

to

b

e

p

l

aye

d

b

ac

k

, t

h

en press [PLAY

B

]

or

[

OK

]

.

An image will be pla

y

ed back from the selected track

and

g

o to the next one in turn

.

3

)

Press [STOP

C

]

to stop playback.

• Pr

ess

[

TITLE

]

to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e t

h

um

b

nai

l

again

.

N

otes

o

n

J

PEG

a

n

d

K

O

DAK Pi

ctu

r

e

C

D

:

• A

f

ter track is displayed

f

or 5 seconds or 10 seconds

(set in “Slide Show” on page 77) the display moves to

the next track

.

During JPEG or KODAK Picture CD pla

y

back, press

[

B

]

o

r

[

{

]

to rotate a picture 90 de

g

rees clockwise

or counterclockwise respectivel

y.

(Not available when the display menu appears.)

Using the Title / Disc Menu

Pause

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 73 2013/02/12 21:06:26

74

EN

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

During playback, you can skip forward or backward by

the amount of time you set in “Playback” menu. To set

the time amount, refer to “

8

Variable Skip / Repla

y

” on

pa

g

e 108.

During pla

y

back, press [SKI

P

]

if

y

ou want to skip

forward. Press [REPLA

Y

] if

y

ou want to skip

bac

kw

a

r

d.

You can play back from where you last stopped the disc

.

1) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [STOP

C

]

.

The resume messa

g

e will appear

.

Resume ON

2) Press [PLAY B

]

.

In a few seconds, pla

y

bac

k

will resume from the point

k

at which it stopped last. You can resume pla

y

back

at

k

the same point even if you turn the unit to the standby

mode (HDD/DVD only)

.

To cancel the resume pla

y

back

and start playing back

k

the disc from the beginning, press

[

STOP C

]

again

while the pla

y

back

is stopped.

k

For HDD:

You can set a resume point per every title.

For DVD+RW/+R, DVD-RW/-R, Video CD, Audio CD

and JPEG files

:

You can set onl

y

one resume point per disc

.

N

ot

e

• For JPEG

f

iles, playback will resume

f

rom the

beginning o

f

the

f

ile at which playback was stopped

.

• Resume Pla

y

back is available when

y

ou pla

y

back the

video CD without PBC function

.

• Some video CD with the PBC

f

unction resume

pla

y

back from the beginning of the track

.

Note

• Forwar

d

/reverse spee

d

wi

ll

b

e in

d

icate

d

wit

h

icons

as

fo

ll

o

w

s.

forward (a

pp

rox. s

p

eed

)

2x

:

2

0

x

:

40x:

reverse (approx. speed

)

5

x

:

20x:

40x:

1

) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [

D

]

or

[

E

]

.

Every time you press

[

D

]

o

r

[

E

]

, approximate speed

will be changed as follows.

Fast

f

orward or

f

ast reverse playback across titles (

f

or

HDD/DVD) is not possible

.

20x

normal

speed

playback

2x 20x5x 40x40x

For video CD, a

pp

roximate forward/reverse s

p

eeds are

2x

,

8x

,

16x

.

For audio CD, approximate speed is fixed at 8x with

sound (indicated with

/

)

.

2

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to the normal pla

y

back

.

Rapid playback function is available only during

pla

y

back

.

This function is available onl

y

on discs recorded in the

Dolby Digital

f

ormat, and plays back in a slightly

f

aster

/

s

l

ower spee

d

w

h

i

l

e

k

eeping t

h

e soun

d

output

.

1) During pla

y

back, press [RAPID PLAY]

.

B

0.8

x

:

Pr

ess

[

R

APID PLAY

]

o

nce during playback

.

Plays back approximately at 0.8 times of normal

pla

y

back.

B

1

.

3

x

:

Press

[

R

APID PLAY

]

twice during playback

.

Plays back approximately at 1.3 times of normal

playback

.

B

:

Pr

ess

[

R

APID PLAY

]

3

rd time to pla

y

back in

normal speed.

N

o

e

ff

ects.

2

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to the normal playback.

N

ot

e

• Audio (lan

g

ua

g

e) settin

g

cannot be chan

g

ed while

using this mode.

• This feature may not work at some point in a disc

.

• Audio is PCM during rapid playback mode except

when using digital audio connection

.

• When usin

g

di

g

ital audio connection (COAXIAL), the

LPCM sound (2 channel) will be output

.

Resume Playback

Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback

Rapid Playback

Variable Skip / Variable Replay

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 74 2013/02/12 21:06:26

75

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

F].

Playback will be paused and sound will be muted.

2

) Press [G] repeatedly

.

Playback will advance one frame (or step) at a time

when you press

[

G

]

with the sound muted.

T

o play back step by step backward

:

Press

[

H]repeatedl

y

.

Every time you press the button, the playback will go

backward by one frame

.

• Press and hold

[

H

]

/

[

G

]

to reverse / advance

c

ontinuous

l

y

.

3

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to the normal playback

.

Note

• Onl

y

step b

y

step forward pla

y

back is available for

pla

y

ing back video CD

.

N

ot

e

• Forward/reverse s

p

eed will be indicated with icons

a

s follows

.

f

orward (approx. speed)

1

/

16x:

1

/

8x:

1

/

3x:

reverse (approx. speed)

1/16x:

1

/

8x:

1

/

4x:

• Onl

y

slow forward is available when pla

y

ing back

vi

deo

C

D

.

1) During pla

y

back, press [PAUSE

F

]. Then

p

ress

[

D

]

or

[

E

]

.

Every time you press

[

D

]

o

r

[

E

]

,

approximate spee

d

w

ill be changed as follows. (The sound will remain

muted.

)

1/8x

pause

1/16x 1/8x1/16x 1/3x1/4x

2) Press [PLAY

B

]

to return to the normal playback.

You can play back a title being recorded

f

rom the

b

eginning w

h

i

l

e recor

d

ing continues

.

1) During recor

d

ing, press [PLAY

B

]

.

Playback of the title you are recording will start from

t

he be

g

innin

g.

• Elapsed playback time will be displayed in the front

panel display.

2) Press [STOP

C

]

o

nce

t

o stop the playback, .

The front panel display will switch back to show the

e

lapsed recording time

.

If you press [STOP

C

]

twice, it will stop the recording.

With regard to HDD, you can continue recording a

program w

h

i

l

e p

l

aying

b

ac

k

anot

h

er tit

l

e.

T

o do so,

p

ress

[

TITLE

]

durin

g

recordin

g

and select a title

y

ou like to pla

y

back, and then press

[

PLAY

B

]

.

(

You can also start the pla

y

back from the title list menu.

)

To p

l

ay

b

ac

k

a tit

l

e

b

eing recor

d

e

d

w

h

i

l

e continuing to

record, re

f

er to “Chasing Playback during Recording”

above (available only with HDD).

Note

• Video CD, audio CD, JPEG files recorded on a disc can

also be played back during HDD recording

.

Not

e

•

You can also use the special pla

y

back functions such

as

[

E

]

,

[

D

]

etc. during chasing pla

y

back mode.

•

[

REC

]

is invalid during chasing playback.

•

You can no longer

f

ast

f

orward the playback when it

c

omes to a

f

ew seconds be

f

ore the current recording

p

o

i

nt

.

Step by Step Playback Chasing Playback during Recording

Slow Forward / Slow Reverse Playback

Simultaneous Playback and Recording

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 75 2013/02/12 21:06:26

76

EN

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

Not

e

• When selecting a smaller

f

actor than the current one,

t

h

e zoom area wi

ll

not

b

e

d

isp

l

aye

d.

• To exit the zoom menu,

p

ress

[

RETURN

]

repeatedl

y

at ste

p

3.

• To cancel the zoom function, select “x1.0” usin

g

[

K

/

L

]

, then press

[

OK

]

at step 3

.

• When you zoom a picture during a slide show, the

slide show will be put in the pause mode. Press

[

PLAY B

]

to resume the slide show and the zoom

function will be turned off

.

1

) During playback, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

)

Use [

{

/

{

B

] to select

menu.

e.g.) DVD-vi

d

e

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3) Use [

K

/

L

] to select a desired zoom factor to zoom,

then press [OK].

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

× 1.2

× 1.5

× 2.0

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

Z

oom menu will appear.

T

here are

f

our options

(

x1.0, x1.2, x1.5 and x2.0), these are displayed

exc

l

u

d

ing t

h

e current zoom rate.

Z

oom area wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

a

y

e

d.

4)

Use [

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

zoom position,

then press [OK].

Z

oom pla

y

back will start.

T

his feature allows

y

ou to assign a specific point on a title

to

be

ca

ll

ed

bac

k l

ate

r

.

1) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY] to bring up the

displa

y

menu

.

If the displa

y

menu is alread

y

shown, skip to step 2

.

2) Use

[

{

/

{

B

]

to select to displa

y

the marker list

.

e.g.) DVD-vide

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a desired marker number.

W

h

en it reac

h

es t

h

e

d

esire

d

point, press [OK].

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

---

1

2

3

4

5

6

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

The title (track) number and the time will be displayed

.

4

)

To return to the marker later:

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select the desired marker number

,

t

hen pres

s

[

OK

]

.

N

ot

e

• To clear a marker

,

select the marker number to be

cleared, then press

[

CLEAR

]

.

• All markers will be erased when you operate these

operations listed below

.

– opening the disc tray (DVD/CD only)

– turning the unit to the standb

y

mode (DVD/ CD onl

y)

– make additional recording on the disc (DVD only

)

– editing any title (DVD only)

–

d

ivi

d

ing t

h

e tit

l

e (HDD on

l

y)

– deleting a scene of the title (HDD only

)

• You can mark up to 6 points

.

• Mar

k

er setting is not avai

l

a

bl

e w

h

en you p

l

ay

b

ac

k

the video CD with PBC

f

unction

.

Zoom Marker Setting

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 76 2013/02/12 21:06:26

77

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

Available repeat

f

unction may vary depending on discs

.

1

) During p

l

a

yb

ac

k

press [DISPLAY], t

h

en procee

d

to

ste

p

2), or

p

ress [REPEAT] then

p

roceed to ste

p

3)

.

• I

f

the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2

.

2

) Use

[

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e se

l

ection

m

enu

.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

K

/

L

] to select a desired repeat t

y

pe, then

p

ress [OK]

.

e.

g

.) HDD/DV

D

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

OFF

Title

Chapter

A – B

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

e.

g

.) audio CD, video CD

1/ 5

CD

0:00:15 / 0:05:00

OFF

Track

All

A – B

e.g.) JPEG file

s

1/ 5 0:00:05

JPEG

OFF

Track

All

Group

T

he selected repeat pla

y

back will start.

Repeat

Title

1/ 5 1/ 5

+RW

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

T

it

l

e (HDD/DVD on

l

y)

:

Th

e current tit

l

e wi

ll

b

e p

l

aye

d

b

ac

k

repeate

dl

y

.

Chapter (HDD/DVD only)

:

The current chapter will be pla

y

ed back repeatedl

y.

All (DVD/Audio CD/Video CD without PBC function

/

d

isc with JPEG

):

All titles in the media will be pla

y

ed back repeatedl

y.

A-B

(

HDD/DVD/Audio CD/Video CD without PBC

function onl

y

):

Desired section can be pla

y

ed back repeatedl

y.

1

)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “A-B”, then press

[

OK

]

.

2

)

Press

[

OK

]

at the desired startin

g

point A

.

3

)

Press

[

OK

]

at the desired endin

g

point B

.

T

rack

(

Audio CD/Video CD without PBC function

/

J

PEG files onl

y

)

:

T

he current track or file will be pla

y

ed back repeatedl

y.

Group (JPEG

f

iles only):

T

he current

f

older will be played back repeatedly.

You can play back a disc randomly instead of playing

b

ack in the original order

.

1

)

Press [MENU]

.

2

)

Use [K

/

L

]

to select “DISC Pla

y

back Mode”, then

press [OK].

“DISC Pla

y

back Mode” menu will appear.

For JPEG, use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Photo”, then press

[

OK

]

.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

]

to select “Random Pla

y

”, then press [OK].

Ran

d

om p

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

start

.

N

ote

• To cancel random pla

y

back, press

[

STOP

C

]

twice

d

uring random playback. “OFF” appears on the TV

s

cr

ee

n

.

• For Video CD with PBC function, the PBC setting will

b

e switched to the standby mode automatically

w

h

en you start ran

d

om p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

N

ot

e

• Point B for the repeat A-B pla

y

back should be set

within the same title or track as point A.

• To cance

l

t

h

e repeat p

l

a

yb

ac

k

, se

l

ect “OFF” at step 3.

The repeat setting will also be cancelled when you

stop playback

.

• You cannot select “Group” during the random

playback

.

• Repeat playback is not available when you play bac

k

the Video CD with PBC function

.

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

You can select the display time between 5 seconds and

10 secon

d

s

.

1) Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Random Playback” on page

77.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Slide Show”, then press [OK].

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

isp

l

ay time, t

h

en press [OK].

4) Press [MENU] to ex

i

t.

N

ot

e

•

Large-size JPEG files take a few moments to be

d

isp

l

aye

d.

Repeat Playback

Random Playback

Slide Show

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 77 2013/02/12 21:06:27

78

EN

N

ot

e

•

To erase tracks you selected, press

[

CLEAR

]

at step 4

.

•

You can program up to 50 trac

k

s.

•

To cancel program playback, press

[

STOP

C

]

twice

d

uring program p

l

ay

b

ac

k

. “OFF” appears on t

h

e TV

screen

.

•

Program information will be retained until you turn

the unit to the standb

y

mode or open the disc tra

y

.

•

You may also select a desired track using

[the Number buttons

]

at step 4.

•

For video CD with PBC

f

unction, the PBC setting will

b

e switc

h

e

d

to t

h

e stan

db

y mo

d

e automatica

ll

y

when you start program playback

.

You can program the disc to pla

y

back in

y

our desired

o

r

de

r

.

1

) Press [MENU]

.

2) Use

[

K /

L

] to select “DISC Playback Mode”, then

press [OK].

“DISC Pla

y

back Mode” menu will appear

.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Program Play”, then press

[

OK]

.

4

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select a desired track, then press [OK]

or

[

B

]

.

DISC Playback Mode

Program Play

0:00:00Total

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Repeat this step until you program all the desired

t

r

ac

k

s.

5

)

Press [PLAY

B

]

.

DISC Playback Mode

Program Play

0:31:07Total

09 04 10 06 -- -- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Program playback will start.

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

By p

l

aying

b

ac

k

t

h

e autostart recor

d

ing, you can pause

or go

b

ac

k

t

h

e TV program you are current

l

y watc

h

ing.

For the autostart recording refer to “AUTOSTAR

T

RECORDING” on pa

g

e 46

.

To pause and resume the TV pro

g

ram

:

1) W

h

en watc

h

ing TV program t

h

roug

h

t

h

is unit’s

tuner, press [PAUSE F].

TV pro

g

ram will be paused and sound will be muted.

2) Press [PLAY

B

] to resume the TV program you were

watching from where you have paused.

To rewind or fast forward the TV program

:

When watching TV program through this unit’s

tuner, press

[

H

]

,

[

E

]

,

[REPLAY

],

[

G

]

,

[

D

]

or

[

SKIP ].

• While playing back the autostart recording, pressing

[

H

]

o

r

[

G

]

s

k

ips p

l

ay

b

ac

k

point 5 minutes

backward or

f

orward

.

To go back to the specific time:

1) W

h

en watc

h

ing a TV program t

h

roug

h

t

h

is unit’s

tuner, press [DISPLAY], t

h

en press [OK].

2

)

Use [

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

or [the Number buttons] to enter

a desired time, then

p

ress [OK]

.

• W

h

i

l

e p

l

a

y

ing

b

ac

k

t

h

e

autosta

r

t

recor

d

ing, press

[

STOP

C

]

to cance

l

t

h

e p

l

a

yb

ac

k

.

• W

h

en watc

h

ing TV program or w

h

i

l

e p

l

aying

b

ac

k

t

h

e

au

t

os

t

ar

t

recording, press

[

DISPLAY

]

once to display

t

h

eau

t

os

t

ar

t

recording in

f

ormation. Re

f

er to

“

A

utostar

t

Recording In

f

ormation” on page 23.

• N

o

i

se

r

educt

i

o

n

a

n

d

z

oo

m f

u

n

ct

i

o

n

s

a

r

e

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

while playing back the

autosta

r

t

recording

.

N

ote

• While playing back the autostart recording, you

c

annot change the channels

.

• W

h

i

l

e p

l

aying

b

ac

k

t

h

e autostart recor

d

ing, you

c

annot change the DTV audio language

.

• If you change to DVD mode or if the timer recording

starts while playing back the autostart recording, the

p

la

y

back will be stopped

.

• When this unit turns on for the timer recordin

g

s, the

autostart recordin

g

will not be performed.

• For the contents o

f

the autostart recording, you

c

annot c

h

ange t

h

e TV au

d

io

.

Program Playback Playing Back the Autostart Recording

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 78 2013/02/12 21:06:27

79

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

SEARCH

Usin

g

[

H

]

/

[

G

]

1) During playback, press [G] to skip the current title

or chapter and move to the next.

T

he title or chapter will move forward one at a time

.

• If there is no chapter in one title, the current title will

be skipped.

T

o go back to the beginning of the current title or

c

hapter, press [

H

]

.

Press it repeatedl

y

to go to the previous title or chapter.

T

he title or chapter will move backward one at a time.

Usin

g

[DISPLAY

]

1) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

]

to select

e

.g.) DVD-vi

d

e

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

T

he num

b

er next to will be highlighted.

3) Title:

Use

[

K

/

L

]

or

[

the Number buttons

]

to enter a

des

ir

ed

t

i

t

l

e

n

u

m

be

r

to

sea

r

ch

,

then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

T

it

l

e searc

h

wi

ll

start.

C

ha

p

ter

:

Press

[

B

] to move to the number next to

fo

r

chapter.

Use

[

K

/

L

] or [the Number buttons] to enter a

d

esire

d

c

h

apter num

b

er to searc

h

, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

After the search, pla

y

back will start automaticall

y.

Using [

H

]

/

[

G

]

1) During playback, press [G] to ski

p

the current

track/file and move to the next.

T

he track/file will move forward one at a time.

T

o go back to the beginning of the current track/file,

p

ress

[

H

]

.

Press it repeatedly to go to the previous track/file. The

track/file will move backward one at a time.

For JPEG files, press it once to go to the previous file.

Note

• During CD p

l

ay

b

ac

k

you can enter a trac

k

num

b

er

d

irect

l

y using [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

f

or track search

without displaying the menu

.

• Track search usin

g

[

DISPLAY

]

i

s not available when

you play back the video CD with PBC function

.

Us

i

ng [DISPLAY]

1) During playback, press [DISPLAY] to bring up the

d

isplay menu

.

I

f

the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.

2

)

Use [

{

/

{

B

]

to select

e.

g

.) audio CD

1/ 5

CD

0:00:15 / 0:05:00

T

he num

b

er next to will be highlighted.

3

)

Use [K

/

L

]

or [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] to enter a

desired track/file number to search, then press [OK].

A

fter the search, pla

y

back will start automaticall

y.

N

ot

e

• In search mode display, total numbers o

f

each search

contents (title/chapter/time) are shown as a

d

enominator

.

1/ 5 1/ 5 0:01:00 / 1:23:45

DVD

Video

tota

l

num

b

er

o

f

title

s

total num

b

er

of chapter

s

tota

l

t

im

e

o

f

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e

1

V

Note

• With regard to HDD, chapter search using

[

H

]

/

[

G

]

is avai

l

a

bl

e on

l

y wit

h

in t

h

e same tit

l

e

.

Title / Chapter Search Track Search

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 79 2013/02/12 21:06:27

80

EN

1

)During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY] to

b

ring up t

h

e

d

isp

l

ay menu

.

If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.

2) Use [

{

/

{

B

] to select

e.g.) DVD-vide

o

1/ 5 1/ 5 0:01:00 / 1:23:45

DVD

Video

e.g.) audio C

D

1/ 5

CD

0:00:15 / 0:05:00

T

h

e

n

u

m

be

r n

e

x

t

to

will be highlighted.

T

o

m

o

v

e

to

t

h

e

n

u

m

be

r n

e

x

t

to

, press [

B

]

.

W

h

en time searc

h

is not avai

l

a

bl

e, an

d

time

counter are not displayed

.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B] or [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] to enter

a

d

esire

d

time to searc

h

, t

h

en press [OK].

After the search, pla

y

back will start automaticall

y.

N

ote

• Time search is available onl

y

in the same track, file or

t

i

tle.

• Time searc

h

is not avai

l

a

bl

e w

h

en you p

l

ay

b

ac

k

t

h

e

video CD with PBC

f

unction

.

SEARCH

Time Search

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 80 2013/02/12 21:06:27

8

1

EN

Recording Playback

Basic Setup

Connections EditingIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

DVD-video may have subtitles in 1 or more languages.

A

vailable subtitle languages can be found on the disc

case. You can switch subtitle languages anytime during

playback

.

1

) During playback, press [DISPLAY]

.

2)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e se

l

ection

men

u

.

e.

g

.) DVD-video

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired subtitle lan

g

ua

g

e,

then

p

ress [OK].

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

OFF

1.English

Video

Subtitle will be displa

y

ed in the selected language

.

W

hen selectin

g

“OFF”, subtitle will disappear

.

SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO

N

ot

e

• Some discs will only allow you to change the subtitle

f

rom the disc menu. Press

[

TITLE

]

o

r

[

DISC MENU

]

t

o

displa

y

the disc menu.

• I

f

a 4-digit language code appears in the subtitle

menu, re

f

er to “LANGUAGE CODE” on page 121

.

Y

ou can select the format of audio and video as you prefer depending on the contents of the disc you are playing back.

When playing back a DVD-video recorded with 2 or more

soundtracks (these are often in different languages), you

can switch them during playback.

When playing back video CD, audio CD you can switch

“

L/R”(stereo), “L”(left) or “R”(right)

.

1) During playback press [DISPLAY], then proceed to

step 2), or press [AUDIO] then proceed to step 3).

• If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2

.

2) Use

[

{

/

{

B

]

to select to display the selection

menu.

3) Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a desired audio soundtrack or

audio channel, then press [OK].

F

o

r DVD-vi

deo

• A

ud

i

o

sou

n

dt

r

ac

k will

s

wi

tc

h

.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

1.Dolby Digital 5.1ch English

2.Dolby Digital 2ch English

Video

• I

f

the title contains both main and sub audio, you can

f

urther select “L” (main), “R” (sub), or “L/R” (mixed o

f

main an

d

su

b

).

For audio CD

,

video CD

•

A

ud

i

o

cha

nn

el

wi

ll

s

wi

tch.

e

.g.) au

d

io CD

1/ 5

CD

0:00:15 / 0:05:00

1. L/R

2. L

3. R

N

ote

• Some

d

iscs wi

ll

on

l

y a

ll

ow you to c

h

ange t

h

e

soundtrack

f

rom the disc menu. Press

[

TITLE

]

or

[

DISC MENU

]

to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e

d

isc menu.

Switching Subtitles Switching Audio Soundtrack

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 81 2013/02/12 21:06:28

82

EN

SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO

So

m

e

DVD-vi

deos

h

a

v

e

sce

n

es

s

h

ot

fr

o

m 2

o

r m

o

r

e

angles. Angle information should be on the disc case i

f

the disc contains multi-angle scenes

.

1) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

) Use [

{

/

{

B] to select , then press [OK].

e

.g.) DVD-vide

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

A

ngle icon appears when a switching camera angle is

a

v

a

i

lable.

A

ngle will switch each time

y

ou press

[

OK

]

.

T

his function reduces noise in the pla

y

back picture

.

1) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

) Use [

{

/

{

B

]

to select to display the selection

m

enu.

e

.g.) DVD-vi

d

e

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3

) Use [K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

option, t

h

en press

[

OK].

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

OFF

Type 1

Type 2

Y

our setting will be activated

.

O

FF : When playing back titles with a very small

amount of noise such as DVD-video

.

T

ype 1 : For the titles recorded in compressed video

mo

d

e such as SLP mo

d

e

.

Ty

pe 2

:

Same as t

y

pe 1, onl

y

more effective.

N

ot

e

• Angle icon does not appear on the TV screen in case

y

ou set “Angle Icon” to “OFF” in the “Pla

y

back” menu.

Refer to page 108

.

Switching Camera Angles Reducing Block Noise

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 82 2013/02/12 21:06:28

83

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

INFORMATION ON EDITING

1. Title name (editable

)

:

Recording date, time, channel

and the recording mode will be assigned

automatica

ll

y as t

h

e tit

l

e name unti

l

you e

d

it it

.

2

.

Title information: Time at which the recording of

the title was started

,

duration of the title

,

date

recorded, channel recorded, and the recordin

g

mode

in whi

c

h

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e

w

as

r

eco

r

ded.

3. Title List

:

List of titles recorded on the HDD. Each

t

itle is indicated b

y

its index picture. Following icons

may be displayed on the index picture

.

:

Indicating the title has never been played back.

:

Indicatin

g

the title is protected

.

:

Indicating the title is a copy-protected title

.

I

:

I

f

you call up the title list while recording, “

I

”

will be displayed on the index picture o

f

the

tit

l

e current

l

y

b

eing recor

d

e

d.

4. Arrow: Indicatin

g

there is a previous / next pa

g

e.

5. Title list pa

g

e number: Current pa

g

e / total pa

g

es.

6. Title list

:

List of the titles recorded on the disc, and

t

heir information

.

7

.

Arr

o

w

:

Indicatin

g

there is a previous / next pa

g

e.

8.

Ti

t

l

e

inf

o

rm

at

i

o

n

:

On the first line

,

title name

(

editable) is displa

y

ed. On the second line, the date

recorded and length of the title are displa

y

ed.

EMPTY SPACE

:

The portion o

f

the disc where there

are no recordin

g

s made. As for the EMPTY SPACE,

available recording time b

y

the selected recording

mode is displayed on the second line.

9. Recording mode

:

Currently selected recording mode

is displayed here

.

10. Capacit

y

indicator

:

Indicatin

g

the position and the

amount of each title in the disc. The

p

ortion for the

selected title is hi

g

hli

g

hted

.

• It ma

y

not indicate the precise capacit

y

of the disc.

• If the duration of a title is too short, it may not be

reflected in the capacity indicator

.

11. Index pictures: A cut from the recorded content is

displayed here

.

12. Submenu: Submenus

f

or the selected menu are

d

isp

l

aye

d

h

ere

.

13. Tit

l

e name (e

d

ita

bl

e)

:

I

f

you do not name the title,

t

h

e recor

d

e

d

ate, time, c

h

anne

l

, an

d

t

h

e recor

d

ing

mo

d

e are

d

isp

l

aye

d

h

ere

.

14. Pro

g

ress bar: Indicatin

g

the pro

g

ress of the

playback

.

15. Preview window

:

Preview of the selected title is

d

isplayed here

.

16. Playback status: Indicating the current playbac

k

status o

f

the selected title

.

Press

[

STOP C] to exit the title list.

Title list allows you to check the titles recorded on the HDD or the disc easily. You can choose a title to play back

f

rom

this list and easily edit the titles as you prefer

.

1

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

Overwrite NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

Play

Edit

SP(2Hr)

Chapter Mark

Hide Chapter

Index Picture

Title Dividing

Edit Title Name

Title Delete

Edit

NOV/26/12 11:35AM CH13 EP

2

1 : 05 : 00

Title List

1 / 6

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 SP

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

7

121314

15

16

10

98

11

6

2 1

34 45

DVD modeHDD mode

e.g.) DVD

Press [HDD], then press [TITLE]

.

Press [DVD], then press [TITLE]

.

Guide to a Title List

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 83 2013/02/12 21:06:28

84

EN

N

ote

• Once you have finalized a DVD+R/ DVD-R, you

cannot edit or record anything on that disc.

• While recording a title to an HDD or a DVD, onl

y

deleting HDD titles is available

.

INFORMATION ON EDITING

P

ress [HDD]

f

irst

.

1)

Press [TITLE]

.

2

)

Use [

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

tit

l

e, t

h

en

press

[

OK

].

Title List

1 / 6

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 SP

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Edit”, then

p

ress [OK].

Resume Playback

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Delete Multiple Titles

Dubbing

Edit

Scene Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Title Dividing

Protect

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 SP

1

1 : 05 : 00

Press [DVD]

f

irst

.

1

)

Press [TITLE]

.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

tit

l

e, t

h

en press [OK].

1

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

SP(2Hr)

3)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].

1

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

Overwrite

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

SP(2Hr)

Edit

Play

Edit

Title Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Index Picture

Title Dividing

Hide Chapter

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

1 : 05 : 00

M

e

d

i

a

HDD DVD

Av

a

il

ab

l

e

F

eatu

r

es

Putting names on titles

✔

Deleting a title

✔

Deleting selected titles

✔

Deleting a scene of a title

✔

Adding / deleting chapter marks

✔

Hiding chapters

✔

Protecting a title

✔

Dividing a title

✔

*

1

Setting an index picture

✔

Finalizing a disc

✔

Making edits compatible

✔

*

2

Putting name on disc

✔

Setting or Releasing disc protect

✔

:

Av

a

il

ab

l

e

:

N

ot

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

*

1

: -RW/+RW discs only

*

2

: +RW discs only

Edit Menu

How to Access the Edit Menu

H

DD

D

V

D

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 84 2013/02/12 21:06:28

8

5

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

You can

d

e

l

ete a tit

l

e w

h

ic

h

you

d

o not nee

d

anymore

.

Please be advised that the title once deleted cannot be brought back.

If you are editing the titles on HDD, press [HDD] first

.

If you are editing the titles on DVD, press

[

DVD

]

first

.

1

Press

[

TITLE

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

to select a desired

title to delete, then press [OK].

If you are editing the titles on HDD, proceed to step 4

.

If you are editing the titles on DVD, proceed to step 3

.

HDD m

ode

Title List

1 / 1

Title 1

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

DVD m

ode

1

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

SP(2Hr)

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “E

d

it”, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

1

2

3

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

Overwrite

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

SP(2Hr)

Edit

Play

N

ot

e

• For DVD+RW/DVD-RW, the available disc space will

increase onl

y

when the last recorded title in the title

l

ist is deleted. For DVD+R/DVD-R, the disc space will

n

ot

be

a

ff

ected.

• Deleted part of the titles in the capacit

y

indicator

changes in color

.

• As for DVD+RW/DVD-RW if you delete the title, deleted

title will be displa

y

ed as “EMPTY SPACE”.

• For DVD, it ma

y

take a while to write the data to the

disc after

y

ou press

[

OK] at step 5.

Deleting a Title

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 85 2013/02/12 21:06:28

8

6

EN

EDITING

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Title Delete”,

t

h

en press [OK].

HDD mo

de

Resume Playback

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Delete Multiple Titles

Dubbing

DVD mode

Edit

Title Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Index Picture

Title Dividing

Hide Chapter

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

1 : 05 : 00

Confirmation message will appear

.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press

[

OK

]

.

T

h

e tit

l

e is now

d

e

l

ete

d

.

Title List

1 / 1

Title 2

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5

2 3

1

2

3

EMPTY SPACE

0:21:14 SP (2Hr)

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

SP(2Hr)

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 86 2013/02/12 21:06:28

8

7

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

4

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

to select the title

you want to delete, then press [OK].

Title List

1 / 1Press ‘CLEAR’ to confirm.

Title 1

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

Tras

h

mar

k

wi

ll

appear in

d

icating t

h

e tit

l

e is

marked

f

or deletion

.

5

Repeat step 4 unti

l

y

ou se

l

ect a

ll

t

h

e

titles

y

ou want to delete.

Title List

1 / 1

Title 2

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

23

Press ‘CLEAR’ to confirm.

6

Press [CLEAR].

Con

f

irmation message will appear

.

7

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

Ti

t

l

es

a

r

e

n

o

w

de

l

eted.

Title List

1 / 1

Title 1

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4

2 3

T

o

r

e

m

o

v

e

t

h

e

t

r

as

h m

a

rk fr

o

m

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e:

Select the title with the trash mark, then press

[

OK

]

.

You can

d

e

l

ete tit

l

es w

h

ic

h

y

ou

d

o not nee

d

an

y

more

.

P

l

ease

b

e a

d

vise

d

t

h

at t

h

e tit

l

es once

d

e

l

ete

d

cannot

b

e

b

roug

h

t

b

ac

k

.

1

Press [HDD], then press [TITLE]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B] to se

l

ect any tit

l

e,

t

h

en press [OK].

Title List

1 / 1

Title 1

12:00AM (1:00:00) MON JAN/ 9/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

3

Use [K

/

L] to se

l

ect “De

l

ete Mu

l

ti

pl

e

Titles”, then

p

ress [OK]

.

Resume Playback

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Delete Multiple Titles

Dubbing

Deleting Selected Titles

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 87 2013/02/12 21:06:29

88

EN

EDITING

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

Edit - Edit Title Name

No

Yes

MY FAVORITE

1

1 : 05 : 00

The title name is now updated.

5

Press [RETURN] once or repeate

dl

y to

go

b

ac

k

to t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist.

For DVD, the data will be written onto the disc

momentarily

.

T

h

is operation may ta

k

e a

wh

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

You can put title names on the titles and change the names

f

rom this menu

.

1

)

Use [K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

c

h

aracter set, t

h

en

press

[

OK

]

.

2

) Follow the list below, use [the Number buttons]

repeatedl

y

until the desired letter appears

.

When you

f

inish entering a title name, press [OK]

.

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

abc

def

ghi

jkl

mno

pqrs

tuv

wxyz

! ” # $ % & ’ ( )

* + , - . / : ; < = >

? @ [ ] ^ _ { | }

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

1

ABC abc @ ! ?

123

(*1) (*1)

Select

Press

*

1 Pr

ess

, character set will be changed to “ @!? ”

mode automatically. Press

to

to go back to

the previous character set

.

• To delete letters, press

[

CLEAR

]

repeatedl

y

.

Holding

[

CLEAR

]

will

d

elete all letters

.

• Use

[

s

/

B

]

to move the cursor to the left and right

.

• You can enter u

p

to 30 letters.

Note

• Unde

f

ined letters in a title name are shown by “*”. I

f

y

ou

d

e

l

ete t

h

em, a

d

joining

l

etters may c

h

ange to “*”

o

r ot

h

er c

h

aracter

.

• Press the corresponding number key repeatedly to

c

hoose the availa

b

le letters

.

e.

g

.) Press

[

2

]

t

hree times to choose the letter “C”

.

G

u

i

de

to

E

d

i

t

Ti

t

l

e

N

a

m

e

1

Follow ste

p

s in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to displa

y

“E

d

i

t

” m

e

n

u.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Edit Title

Name”, then press [OK].

e.g.) DV

D

Edit

Title Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Index Picture

Title Dividing

Hide Chapter

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

1 : 05 : 00

3

To enter a title name

,

follow the

ste

p

s of “Guide to Edit Title Name”

on pa

g

e 88

.

Edit - Edit Title Name

abc

ABC

123

@! ?

1

M

1 : 05 : 00

c

h

aracter se

t

area

f

or entering title names

Putting Names on Titles

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 88 2013/02/12 21:06:29

8

9

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

To a

dd

a c

h

apter mar

k

:

1

Follow steps in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to display

“E

d

i

t

” m

e

n

u.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Chapter Mark”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

Submenu will appear

.

3

Play back the title up to the point

where you want to set a new chapter

m

a

rk

.

W

h

en it comes to t

h

e

d

esire

d

point, press

[

PAUSE

F

]

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Add”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

e.

g

.) DV

D

Delete

Delete All

Add

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

Chapter 2/ 3

Edit - Chapter Mark

1 : 05 : 00

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

Edit - Chapter Mark - Add

No

Yes

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

Chapter 2/ 3

F

1 : 05 : 00

A new chapter mark is now added.

To add more cha

p

ter marks, re

p

eat ste

p

s 3 to 5

.

6

Press [RETURN] once or repeate

dl

y to

go back to the title list.

For DVD

,

the data will be written onto the disc

momentaril

y.

This operation may take a

w

hile to be completed

.

You can put chapter marks in each title. Once a chapter is marked, you can use it for the chapter search feature.

Note

f

or adding or deleting chapter marks

• Maximum number o

f

chapter marks in a title is 99

(

f

or HDD/DVD) and the maximum number o

f

chapter

marks in total is no limit (

f

or HDD) / 254 (

f

or DVD).

If

the number o

f

the chapter marks exceed the limit,

y

ou cannot a

dd

any more c

h

apter mar

k

s.

• Only with regard to DVD editing, you may not be

able to add chapter marks dependin

g

on the

duration of the title or the number of cha

p

ters

.

• Onl

y

with regard to DVD editing, remaining time o

f

the disc may decrease when adding chapter marks or

increase when clearin

g

chapter marks dependin

g

on

the recording time or edited contents

.

• When you search for a point at step 3, you can also

use the special playback functions such as

[

G

]

,

[

D

]e

t

c

.

Chapter Marks (Add)

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 89 2013/02/12 21:06:29

90

EN

EDITING

To

d

e

l

ete a c

h

apter mar

k

:

1

Fo

ll

ow steps in “How to Access t

h

e

Edit Menu” on page 84 to display

“E

d

it” menu.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Chapter Mark”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

Submenu will appear

.

3

Use

[

H

]

/

[

G

]

to

g

o to the chapter

with the chapter mark number you

want to delete, then

p

ress [PAUSE

F

]

.

Chapter mark number is displayed on the

ew screen

.

e.

g

.) DV

D

Delete

Delete All

Add

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

Chapter 2/ 3

Edit - Chapter Mark

1 : 05 : 00

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Delete”, then

press [OK]

.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

Edit - Chapter Mark - Delete

No

Yes

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

Chapter 1/ 2

F

1 : 05 : 00

The selected cha

p

ter mark is now deleted

.

To delete more cha

p

ter marks, re

p

eat ste

p

s 3 to

5

.

6

Press [RETURN] once or repeatedly to

go back to the title list.

For DVD

,

the data will be written onto the disc

momentaril

y.

T

h

is operation may ta

k

e a

w

hile to be completed

.

N

ot

e

• You cannot delete the first chapter mark

.

Chapter Marks (Delete)

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 90 2013/02/12 21:06:29

9

1

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

To delete all cha

p

ter marks:

1

Follow steps in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to display

“E

d

it” menu.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “C

h

apter Mar

k

”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

Submenu will appear

.

3

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Delete All”

,

then

press [OK].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

Edit - Chapter Mark - Delete All

No

Yes

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

Chapter 2/ 3

F

1 : 05 : 00

All cha

p

ter marks are now deleted

.

Chapter 1/ 1

Edit - Chapter Mark

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

1

Delete

Delete All

Add

1 : 05 : 00

5

Press [RETURN] once or repeate

dl

y to

go back to the title list.

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

T

h

is operation may ta

k

e a

wh

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

Chapter Marks (Delete All)

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 91 2013/02/12 21:06:29

92

EN

EDITING

1

Follow steps in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to display

“Edit” menu

.

2

Play back the title up to the point

w

h

ere you want to

d

ivi

d

e t

h

e tit

l

e.

When it comes to the desired point, press

[PAUSE F

]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Title Dividing”,

then press [OK]

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press

[

OK

]

.

The title is now divided into 2 new titles, and it

will go back to the title list automaticall

y

. Title

name’s of the divided titles are identical

,

and

index pictures are reset to the

f

irst scene at this

point

.

Y

ou

ca

n

d

ivi

de

o

n

e

t

i

tle

in

to

2 n

e

w

t

i

tles.

Not

e

• Once a title has been split up, it is not possible to

merge t

h

em

b

ac

k

.

• I

f

an internal HDD or a DVD contains the maximum

number o

f

titles (HDD: 999, DVD+RW/-RW: 49), you

cannot divide any titles

.

• With DVD+RW/-RW, you cannot divide the titles if the

total number of chapters has already reached 254

.

• When you search for a point at step 2, you can also

use the special pla

y

back functions such as

[

G

]

,

[

D

]

etc.

• For DVD, it may start writing

d

ata to t

h

e

d

isc as you

c

omp

l

ete t

h

e e

d

iting proce

d

ure.

Dividing a Title

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 92 2013/02/12 21:06:30

93

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

You can delete a speci

f

ic part o

f

a title

.

1

Follow ste

p

s in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to display

“E

d

it” menu

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Scene Delete”,

then

p

ress [OK]

.

Edit

Scene Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Title Dividing

Protect

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 LP

1

1 : 05 : 00

3

P

l

ay

b

ac

k

t

h

e tit

l

e up to t

h

e point

w

h

ere you want to set a start point

for the scene to be deleted, then

press

[

OK

]

.

To set a start point at the beginning of the title,

p

ress

[

E

]

, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

Edit - Scene Delete

Start

End

Preview

Delete

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 LP

1

1 : 20 : 00

Start point is now set, and the highlight

automatically moves to “End”.

4

Pla

y

back the title up to the point

where

y

ou want to set an end point,

then press [OK]

.

To set an end point at the end of the title, press

[

D

]

, then press

[

OK

]

.

At the end of a title, playback will be in pause

mode. Press

[

P

LAY

B

]

to resume playback from

the beginning of the title.

Edit - Scene Delete

Start

End

Preview

Delete

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 LP

1

1 : 30 : 00

End point is now set, and the hi

g

hli

g

ht

automaticall

y

moves to “Preview”

.

The portion for deletion is indicated in red in the

progress bar at the bottom of the screen

.

Not

e

•

When you search for the start/end point at step 3/4,

you can also use the special playback functions such

as

[

G

]

,

[

D

]

etc.

Deleting a Scene of a Title

Instructions continue on the next page

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 93 2013/02/12 21:06:30

94

EN

EDITING

5

With “Preview” hi

g

hli

g

hted, press

[OK] to

p

review the result.

Ever

y

t

i

me

[

OK] is

p

resse

d

, t

h

e

d

e

l

ete

d

scene

wi

ll

b

e s

h

own inc

l

u

d

ing scene materia

l

5

seconds be

f

ore and a

f

ter the deleted scene

.

• If you are not satisfied with the result, use

[

K

/

L

]to go back to “Start” or “End”, and try

settin

g

them a

g

ain

.

• If you are satisfied with the result, proceed to

step 6.

Before

editing

Edited

start point end point

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “De

l

ete” t

h

en

press

[

OK

].

Edit - Scene Delete

Start

End

Preview

Delete

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 LP

1

1 : 30 : 00

7

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Yes” then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

Edit - Scene Delete

Yes

No

JAN/ 9/12 12:00AM CH10 LP

1

1 : 30 : 00

The selected scene is now deleted.

8

Press [RETURN] once or repeatedly to

go

b

ac

k

to t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 94 2013/02/12 21:06:30

9

5

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

1

Follow steps in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to displa

y

“E

d

i

t

” m

e

n

u.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Protect”, t

h

en

press [OK].

Edit

Scene Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Title Dividing

Protect

JAN/ 6/12 12:00AM CH10 LP

1

1 : 30 : 00

3

Wi

th

“

O

FF ON” se

l

ecte

d

, press

[

OK

]

.

Edit - Protect

OFF ON

JAN/ 6/12 12:00AM CH10 LP

1

1 : 30 : 00

The title is now protected

.

• I

f

the title is alread

y

protected, “ON OFF” will

appear instead. Press

[

OK

]

, to release the title

f

rom protection

.

• T

h

e protecte

d

tit

l

e wi

ll

b

e mar

k

e

d

wit

h

i

con

.

4

Press [RETURN] once or repeate

dl

y to

go

b

ac

k

to t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist.

To prevent the accidental editing, or erasing o

f

the titles, you can protect them using the “Edit” menu

.

Protecting a Title

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 95 2013/02/12 21:06:30

9

6

EN

EDITING

1

Follow steps in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to displa

y

“E

d

i

t

” m

e

n

u.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Hi

d

e C

h

apter”,

then press [OK]

.

Submenu will appear

.

3

Use

[

H

]

/

[

G

]

to go to the chapter

you want to hide, then press

[PAUSE

F

]

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Hi

dd

en”, t

h

en

press

[

OK

].

Edit - Hide Chapter

Hidden

Visible

1

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

Chapter 2/ 3 Visible

1 : 05 : 00

The chapter is now hidden.

5

Press [RETURN] once or repeate

dl

y to

go

b

ac

k

to t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist.

Data will be written onto the disc momentarily

.

This operation may take a

w

hile to be completed

.

I

f

you want hidden chapters to be “Visible”,

se

l

ect t

h

e c

h

apter to

b

e s

h

own. T

h

en use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Visible” at step 4 on page 96

.

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

After the data is written, the title list is displayed

.

N

ot

e

• ”Hidden” will be displa

y

ed in the preview window

while previewin

g

the hidden chapter

.

• When you make all chapters in the title “Hidden”,

“Hidden” is displayed on an index picture of the title

list

.

1

2

3

NOV/26/12 11:35

AM

CH13 EP

MON NOV/26/12 0:10:33

NOV/25/12 11:00

AM

CH12 SP

SUN NOV/25/12 0:20:44

Hidden

EMPTY SPACE

1:37:52 SP (2Hr)

SP(2Hr)

You can hide chapters from the title list. Hidden chapters are skipped during playback

.

Hiding Chapters

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 96 2013/02/12 21:06:30

9

7

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

1

Follow steps in “How to Access the

Edit Menu” on page 84 to displa

y

“E

d

i

t

” m

e

n

u.

2

Play back the title to

f

ind the scene

you want to use as an in

d

ex picture.

When it comes to the desired point,

press [PAUSE

F

]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Index Picture”

,

then

p

ress [OK]

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press

[

OK

]

.

No

Yes

1

Edit - Index Picture

NOV/25/12 11:00AM CH12 SP

F

1 : 05 : 00

A new in

d

ex picture is now set.

5

Press [RETURN] once or repeatedl

y

to

go back to the title list.

Data will be written onto the disc momentarily

.

T

h

is operation may ta

k

e a

w

hile to be completed

.

N

ote

• If the selected picture for an index picture is

o

verwritten, the index picture is reset to the

f

irst

s

cene of the title

.

• When you search for the point at step 2, you can also

u

se the special playback functions such as

[

G

]

,

[

D

]

e

t

c

.

You can set

y

our desired scene as an index picture for each title

.

Setting an Index Picture

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 97 2013/02/12 21:06:31

98

EN

Press [STOP

C

]

if you are playing back a disc

.

1

Press [MENU].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Disc Edit”, then

press [OK]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “E

d

it Disc Name”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

e.g.) DVD+RW

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Make Edits Compatible

Disc Protect OFF ON

A window for enterin

g

a title name will appear

.

Edit Disc Name

abc

ABC

123

@! ?

No Disc Name

Disc DVD+RW

Total Titles 3

Disc Space Used 0:30:48

Disc Protect OFF

Make Edits Compatible Needed

4

To enter a disc name, follow the ste

p

s

of “Guide to Edit Title Name” on pa

g

e

88.

When you finish entering a title name, press

[

OK

]

.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press

[

OK

]

.

Data will be written onto the disc momentarily

.

This operation ma

y

take a

w

hile to be completed

.

T

h

e

d

isc name is now up

d

ate

d.

N

ot

e

• Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

se

l

ect

“Di

sc

E

d

i

t

” wh

e

n fin

a

liz

ed

DVD+R

o

r DVD-R i

s

in

se

r

ted.

You can put a name on the disc and change it from this menu

.

EDITING

Putting Name on Disc

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 98 2013/02/12 21:06:31

99

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

P

ress [STOP

C

]

if you are playing back a disc

.

1

Press [MENU].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Disc Edit”, then

press

[

OK

]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Erase Disc”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

e.g.) DVD+RW

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Make Edits Compatible

Disc Protect OFF ON

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

When you press “Yes”, all the

contents in the disc will be erased.

Are you sure to erase the disc?

Yes

No

momentaril

y.

This operation may take a

wh

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

You can erase all titles on a

d

isc

.

N

ot

e

• When you select “Yes” at step 4, all contents of the

d

i

sc

will

be

e

r

ased.

Erasing Disc

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 99 2013/02/12 21:06:31

100

EN

EDITING

Press [STOP

C

]

if you are playing back a disc

.

1

Press [MENU].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Disc Edit”, then

press [OK]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Ma

k

e E

d

its

Compati

bl

e”, t

h

en press [OK].

Disc Edit

Edit Disc Name

Erase Disc

Make Edits Compatible

Disc Protect OFF ON

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

Activate the Make Edits Compatible?

Yes

No

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

This operation may take a

w

hile to be completed

.

If

y

ou have added or deleted chapters, or made chapters hidden,

y

ou must perform “Make Edits Compatible” to see

t

h

ose

e

ff

ects

o

n

a

n

ot

h

e

r

u

ni

t.

Making Edits Compatible

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 100 2013/02/12 21:06:31

10

1

EN

Playback Editing

Recording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Function Setup Others Español

EDITING

P

ress

[

STOP

C

]

i

f

you are playing back a disc

.

1

Press [MENU].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “HDD Menu”

,

then

p

ress [OK]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

esire

d

type

o

f

deletion, then press [OK].

Select “Delete All Unprotected Titles” to delete

onl

y

unprotected titles.

Select

“D

elete

A

ll

Ti

tles

”

to

delete

all

t

i

tles

including protected titles

.

Delete All Unprotected Titles

Delete All Titles

HDD Menu

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

OK

]

.

Delete entire titles?

Yes

No

All titles are now deleted

.

Deleting All Titles in HDD

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 101 2013/02/12 21:06:31

102

EN

LIST OF SETTINGS

The following table is the contents which you can set and the default setting. Refer to the following table for useful operation

.

Menu Items (highlight is the default) Contents

Genera

l

Settin

g

P

l

ay

b

ac

k

pages 105-10

8

Parenta

l

Loc

k

O

F

level 8 [Adult] to 1 [Kid Sa

f

e]

S

et the parental level for DVD playback

.

Disc Au

d

io

D

ynamic

R

ange

C

ontrol

O

N

O

F

Compressing the range o

f

sound volume

.

P

CM 48kH

z

9

6

kH

z

S

et whether the sound recorded in 96kHz will

b

e down sampled in 48kHz

.

Dolby Digital PCM

St

r

ea

m

S

et the type of sound signal which outputs

from the digital audio output

j

ack

.

D

isc Menu Languag

e

En

gl

is

h

Frenc

h

Spanis

h

Othe

r

S

et the language for disc menu language.

A

udio Languag

e

Origina

l

Eng

l

is

h

Frenc

h

Spanis

h

Ot

h

e

r

S

et the language for audio.

Su

b

tit

l

e Language OF

F

Eng

l

is

h

Fr

e

n

ch

Spanis

h

Ot

h

e

r

S

et the language for subtitles.

A

ngle Icon ON

O

F

S

et whether or not to display the angle icon

.

St

ill M

ode

Aut

o

Fi

e

l

d

Fram

e

S

et the t

y

pe of still image when pausing

p

layback.

Varia

bl

e S

k

ip / Rep

l

ay Varia

bl

e S

k

i

p

5

secon

d

s

15 secon

d

s

3

0 secon

d

s

1 minute

5 minutes

S

et the amount o

f

skip time when you press

[

SKIP

]

.

Variable Replay

5

secon

d

s

15 secon

d

s

30 secon

d

s

1 m

i

nute

5 m

i

nutes

S

et the amount of rewind time when you

p

ress

[

REPLA

Y

]

.

Disp

l

ay

pages 109-111

L

anguage Eng

l

is

h

Françai

s

Es

p

año

l

S

et the language for OSD (on-screen display)

.

Sc

r

ee

n

Sa

v

e

r

O

F

1 min

ute

5

min

utes

10 minute

s

15 minutes

S

et the idling time before the screen saver

sta

r

ts.

FL

D

imme

r

A

ut

o

Brigh

t

Dar

k

S

et the brightness o

f

the

f

ront panel display.

DTV

CC

C

aption Service

page 3

8

O

F

S

ervice1

S

ervice2

S

ervice3

S

ervice4

S

ervice

5

S

ervice

6

S

et the t

y

pe of the DTV closed caption

.

R

ecording

page 4

3

O

N

O

F

S

et whether to record the DTV closed caption

o

r not.

CC Style

pages 39-40

U

ser Settin

g

O

N

O

F

S

et the CC style setting whether or not it is

e

ffective

.

F

ont Size

L

ar

g

e

Middl

e

Small

S

et font size of the displayed caption.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 102 2013/02/12 21:06:31

103

EN

Editing Function Setup

PlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Others Español

LIST OF SETTINGS

Menu Items (highlight is the default) Contents

Genera

l

Settin

g

Displa

y

pages 109-111

CC St

y

le

pages 39-40

F

ont St

y

le Style

1

St

yl

e

2

Sty

l

e

3

Sty

l

e

4

Sty

l

e

5

Sty

l

e6

Style7

Style

8

S

et font st

y

le of the displa

y

ed caption

.

F

ont Opacit

y

Solid

Transparent

Translucent

Flas

h

S

et the font transparenc

y

(Opacit

y

) of the

d

ispla

y

ed caption.

F

ont Color White

Black

Re

d

Gree

n

Blu

e

Yellow

Ma

g

enta

Cya

n

S

et the font color of the displayed caption.

E

dge Type None

Raise

d

Depressed

Uniform

L.S

h

a

d

o

w

R.S

h

a

d

o

w

S

et edge type of the displayed caption

.

E

dge Color Whit

e

Bl

ack

R

ed

G

reen

B

lue

Y

ellow

M

agenta

Cya

n

S

et edge color of the displayed caption

.

B

ac

k

Opacity Solid

Transparent

Trans

l

ucent

F

l

as

h

S

et background transparency (Opacity) o

f

the

d

isp

l

aye

d

captioning

b

ox.

B

ac

k

Co

l

or W

h

it

e

B

l

ac

k

Re

d

G

ree

n

B

l

u

e

Yello

w

Magenta

Cya

n

S

et background color o

f

the displayed caption

b

ox.

V-C

h

ip

MP

AA

R

ating

X

NC-1

7

R

P

G

-1

3

P

G

N

R

S

et t

h

e viewing

l

imitation accor

d

ing to US

movie ratings

.

T

V

R

atin

g

TV-M

A

TV-1

4

TV-P

G

TV-

G

TV-Y7

TV-

Y

None

S

et the viewing limitation according to US T

V

pro

g

ram ratin

g

s.

C

anadian

E

nglish Rating

18+

14+

P

G

C8

+

C

E

S

et the viewin

g

limitation accordin

g

to

Canadian English language ratings.

C

anadian French

R

ating

1

8

ans+

1

6a

n

s

+

1

3a

n

s

+

8a

n

s

+

G

E

S

et the viewing limitation according to

Canadian French language ratings

.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 103 2013/02/12 21:06:32

104

EN

N

ote

• Your change to each setting sta

y

s on even when the power is off

.

• An item which is not currently available is grayed in the on-screen settings

.

LIST OF SETTINGS

Menu Items (highlight is the default) Contents

Genera

l

Setting

Disp

l

a

y

pages 109-111

V-C

h

i

p

Do

wn

loadable

R

ating

Re

g

ion Ratin

g

Ta

bl

e To set t

h

e ratin

g

.

Clear Ratin

g

Table Clear the downloadable ratin

g

information

and its setting.

C

han

g

e

Pass

w

o

r

d

Chan

g

e the password

.

Vi

deo

pages 112-113

Progressive Scan

O

N

O

F

To set the progressive scan mode (set to "ON")

o

r the interlace scan mode (set to "OFF")

.

T

V As

p

ect 4:3 Letter Bo

x

4:3 Pan & Scan

16:9 Wi

d

e

S

et a picture size according to aspect ratio o

f

y

our TV

.

Video Inpu

t

page 56

L

1(Rear) Vi

d

eo In

S-Video In

S

et the video input type for the external input

j

ack.

L

2(Front) Vi

d

eo In

S-Vi

d

eo In

Recor

d

ing

A

uto C

h

apte

r

page 43

OF

F

5 minutes

1

0

min

utes

15 minutes

30 minutes

60

min

utes

Insert c

h

apter mar

k

s at a preset time

interval’s.

Auto

Fin

a

liz

e

page 66

D

i

sc

F

u

l

O

N

O

F

S

et the unit to finalize the disc automaticall

y.

E

n

d

o

f Tim

e

r R

ec

O

N

O

F

Ma

k

e Recor

d

ing Compati

ble

page 43

O

N

OF

F

S

et to pro

h

i

b

it a

dd

itiona

l

recor

d

ing (OFF) or

t

o replace the title list a

f

ter recording (ON).

C

l

oc

k

pages

32

-

3

4

C

l

oc

k

Setting

S

et t

h

e c

l

oc

k

.

Auto C

l

oc

k

Setting

O

F

Auto

Manua

l

S

et t

h

e c

l

oc

k

automatica

ll

y.

Day

l

ig

h

t Saving Time ON

(

MAR-NOV

)

ON

(

APR-OCT

)

O

F

S

et the clock for the daylight saving time.

C

h

a

nn

e

l

pages 29-3

1

Auto

C

h

a

nn

e

l Pr

eset

Antenn

a

Ca

bl

e (Ana

l

og

)

Ca

bl

e (Ana

l

og / Digita

l

)

Tune the channels automaticall

y

.

Manua

l

C

h

anne

l

Preset Tune t

h

e c

h

anne

l

s manua

ll

y

.

T

V Au

d

io Se

l

ec

t

page

3

7

Ste

r

eo

S

AP

S

et the analog TV audio type

f

or output and

r

ecor

d

ing.

H

D

MI

pages 114-115

Format R

G

B

YC

b

C

r

S

et the color space for the HDMI output

.

HDMI Au

d

io

O

N

O

F

S

et to output the HDMI audio signal.

S

et to “OFF” to not output the HDMI audio

s

ignal.

RGB Range Norma

l

Enhanced

S

et the black-white contrast level for HDMI

R

G

B output

.

f

un-Link

(

HDMI CEC

)

O

N

O

F

S

et to utilize fun-Link

(

HDMI CEC

)

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 104 2013/02/12 21:06:32

10

5

EN

Editing Function Setup

PlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Others Español

SETUPS

P

ress

[

STOP

C

]

i

f

you are playing back a disc

.

1

Press

[

MENU

]

an

d

use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

“General Setting” menu will appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Playback”, then

press [OK].

General Setting

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

Channel

HDMI

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired item

,

then press [OK]

.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Parental Lock

Disc Audio

Disc Menu Language

Audio Language

Subtitle Language

Angle Icon

Still Mode

Variable Skip / Replay

4

Re

f

er to

1

t

o

8

on pages 1

0

6-1

08

a

n

d

set

t

h

e

se

l

ected

i

te

m

.

5

When

y

ou finish with the setting,

p

ress [MENU] to exit.

Playback

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 105 2013/02/12 21:06:33

106

EN

SETUPS

1

Parental Lock (Default: OFF) (DVD only)

Some DVD-videos feature a parental lock level. Playback

will stop if the ratings exceed the levels you set, it will

require you to enter a password before the disc will

playback. This feature prevents your children from

viewing inappropriate material

.

Use [

K

/

L

] to select the desired level, then press [OK].

Parental Lock

OFF

8 [Adult]

7 [NC 17]

6 [R]

5 [PG R]

4 [PG 13]

3 [PG]

2 [G]

1 [Kid Safe]

If a password has not been set yet, proceed to

A

.

If a password has been set already, proceed to

B

.

N

ot

e

• Parental lock function ma

y

not be available to some

d

i

scs.

• With some DVDs, it may be difficult to find if they are

compatible with parental lock. Be sure to check if the

parental lock function operates in the way that you

ha

v

e

set.

• Record the password just in case you

f

orget it.

• If there is a DVD in the unit when

y

ou set up the

p

arental lock,

p

ress

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to

act

iv

ate

t

h

e

p

arental lock level

.

A

A passwor

d

h

as not

b

een set yet.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “Yes”. Use [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons]

to enter a new password except

f

or 4737, then press

[

OK

]

.

Change Password?

Yes

No

Password Input

Y

es

Your setting will be activated

.

B

A password has been set already.

•

Use [the Number buttons] to enter the current

password

.

Password Input

Your setting will be activated

.

•

If you want to change password, use [

K

/

L

] to select

“Yes”. Use [the Number buttons] to enter a new

password except

f

or 4737, then press [OK]

.

<c

h

ange t

h

e passwor

d

>

Change Password?

Yes

No

Password Input

Y

e

s

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

N

ot

e

•

P

ress

[

CLEAR

]

to erase numbers entered incorrectly.

• When

y

ou forget the password or

y

ou want to clear

all settin

g

s in the “Parental Lock” menu, enter 4737

usin

g

[

the Number buttons

]

in the

p

assword in

p

ut

window. Password will be cleared and

p

arental levels

will

be

set

to

“

O

FF”

.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 106 2013/02/12 21:06:33

10

7

EN

Editing Function Setup

PlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Others Español

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

SETUPS

2

Disc Audio

Choose the appropriate audio setting

f

or your external

de

vi

ce.

It will only a

ff

ect disc playback

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select desired item, then press

[

OK

]

.

Disc Audio

Dynamic Range Control

PCM

Dolby Digital

A

B

C

A

Dynamic Range Control (Default : ON) (DVD only)

Set to “ON” to compress the range between soft and loud

sounds.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a setting, then press [OK].

Dynamic Range Control

ON

OFF

N

ot

e

•

Dynamic range control

f

unction is available only with

the titles which are recorded in the Dolby Digital

f

ormat

.

B

PCM

(

De

f

ault : 48kHz

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a setting, then press [OK].

PCM

48kHz

96kHz

48kHz : I

f

your ampli

f

ier/decoder is NOT compatible

wit

h

96

k

Hz PCM, se

l

ect “48

k

Hz”. 96

k

Hz soun

d

wi

ll

b

e output in 48

k

Hz.

9

6kHz : I

f

y

our ampli

f

ier/decoder is compatible with

96

k

Hz PCM

,

se

l

ect “96

k

Hz”. 96

k

Hz soun

d

wi

ll

b

e output.

N

ot

e

When pla

y

ing back a disc with cop

y

right protection

•

Even if

y

ou select “96kHz”, the sound will be down

sampled at 48kHz

.

C

Dolby Digital (Default : Stream)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a setting, then press [OK].

Dolby Digital

PCM

Stream

Your setting will be activated

.

PCM : Converts the Dolby Digital into PCM (2 channel).

When your amplifier/decoder is NO

T

compatible with Dolby Digital, set to “PCM”

.

Stream : Outputs Dolby Digital signals

When your amplifier/decoder is compatible

with Dolby Digital, set to “Stream”

.

• With regard to DVD playback, if the audio source is in

Dolby Digital format, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” so that

y

ou can switch to main audio (L), sub audio (R), or a

combination of both (L / R) using your

amplifier / decoder.

3

Disc Menu Language (Default : English) (DVD only)

Set the disc menu language

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a setting, then press [OK].

Disc Menu Language

English

French

Spanish

Other

Your setting will be activated

.

4Audio Language (Default : Original) (DVD only)

Set t

h

e au

d

io

l

anguage

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a settin

g

, then press [OK].

Audio Language

Original

English

French

Spanish

Other

Your setting will be activated

.

• When “Original” is selected, the audio language will be

in the disc’s default language

.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 107 2013/02/12 21:06:33

108

EN

SETUPS

5

Subtitle Language (Default : OFF) (DVD only)

Set the subtitle language

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [OK].

Subtitle Language

OFF

English

French

Spanish

Other

Your setting will be activated

.

If “Other” is selected for

3

to

5

, press 4-di

g

it code

usin

g

[

the Number buttons

]

.

g

Code Input

----

to the language code table on page 121.

N

ote

• Only the languages supported by the disc can be

selecte

d.

• Audio language setting ma

y

not be available to

so

m

e

d

i

scs.

• You can change or switch o

ff

the subtitles on a DVD

a

l

so

fr

o

m

t

h

e

d

i

sc

m

e

n

u

if i

t

i

s

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e.

•

P

ress

[

CLEAR

]

o

r

[

s

]

to erase num

b

ers entere

d

i

ncorrect

l

y

.

6

Angle Icon (Default : ON) (DVD only)

Set to “ON” to show the angle icon during the playback

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a settin

g

, then press [OK].

Angle Icon

ON

OFF

7

Still Mode (Default : Auto) (DVD only)

S

elect “Auto” usually

.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [OK].

Still Mode

Auto

Field

Frame

Your setting will be activated

.

A

uto : Optimum resolution setting (“Field” or

“Frame”) will be selected.

Field : Images in the still mode will be stabilized.

F

rame : Images in the still mode will be highly defined.

N

ote

•

Frame is 1 completed video image made up of 2

f

ields (There are 30 frames per second of NTSC video)

.

8 Variable Skip / Replay

Assign

[

SKIP

]

o

r

[

REPLA

Y

]

to skip or rewind b

y

a

certain amount of time when they are pressed.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a desired item, then

p

ress [OK].

Variable Skip

Variable Replay

A

B

Refer to the explanations below and set the selected item

.

A

V

ariable Skip (De

f

ault: 30 seconds)

S

ets the amount of ski

p

time for

[

SKIP

]

.

Variable Skip

5 seconds

15 seconds

30 seconds

1 minute

5 minutes

B

Variable Repla

y

(Default: 30 seconds)

S

ets the amount of rewind time for

[

REPLA

Y

]

.

Variable Replay

5 seconds

15 seconds

30 seconds

1 minute

5 minutes

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 108 2013/02/12 21:06:33

10

9

EN

Editing Function Setup

PlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Others Español

SETUPS

Pr

ess

[

STOP

C

]

if you are playing back a disc

.

1

Press

[

MENU

]

an

d

use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect

“General Setting”, then press [OK].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Disp

l

ay”, t

h

en

p

ress [OK].

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired item,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

Language

Screen Saver

FL Dimmer

DTV CC

CC Style

V-Chip

1

2

3

4

5

6

Selection menu will appear.

4

R

e

f

e

r

to

1

to

6

on pages 109-111 and

set

t

h

e

se

l

ected

i

te

m

.

• For

4

and

5

re

f

er to pages 38-40.

5

When

y

ou finish with the setting,

p

ress [MENU] to exit.

1Language (Default : English)

S

et the language for the on-screen display

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a setting, then press [OK]

.

Language

English

Français

Español

2

Screen Saver (Default : 10 minutes)

S

et the time to activate the screen saver

f

unction on the

TV screen

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [OK]

.

Screen Saver

OFF

1 minute

5 minutes

10 minutes

15 minutes

Your setting will be activated

.

Display

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 109 2013/02/12 21:06:33

1

0

EN

SETUPS

3

FL Dimmer (Default: Bright)

Set the front panel displa

y

brightness

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [OK].

FL Dimmer

Auto

Bright

Dark

I

f

“Auto” is selected, the display gets dark when the

power is in t

h

e stan

db

y mo

d

e

.

6

V-Chip

W

ith the V-chip system in this unit, you can set the

viewing limitation for the analog/digital TV programs

received from the tuner or recorded on DVDs to prevent

y

our children from watching inappropriate programs. If

the unit detects a blocked program, a restriction message

appears and you are not allowed to view the program

.

1) Use [the Number buttons] to enter the access

password

.

If you have not set the password, first, use

[the Number buttons

]

to set the access password,

then press

[

O

K

]

. The number

y

ou entered will be stored

as the access password.

Password Input

2

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

item, t

h

en press [OK].

V-Chip

MPAA Rating

TV Rating

Canadian English Rating

Canadian French Rating

Downloadable Rating

Change Password

A

B

C

D

E

F

A

MP

AA

R

ating

B

T

V Ratin

g

C

ana

d

ian Eng

l

is

h

Ratin

g

D

C

anadian French Rating

You can set the viewing limitation according to MPAA

rating (US movie ratings), TV Rating (US TV program

ratings), Canadian English Rating (Canadian English

l

anguage Ratings), Canadian French Rating (Canadian

French language Ratings).

1) Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select the desired rating, then press

[OK] repeatedly to switch between view and block.

When it is blocked a key icon will appear.

e.g.

)

MPAA rating

MPAA Rating

X

NC-17

R

PG-13

PG

G

NR

[MPAA Ratin

g]

Rating Categor

y

X

M

ature audience only higher

NC-17

N

o one un

d

er 17 a

d

mitte

d

R

estricted; under 17 requires

a

ccompanying parent or a

d

u

l

t guar

d

ian

PG-1

3

U

n

su

i

tab

l

e

f

o

r

c

hil

d

r

e

n

u

n

de

r 1

3

P

G

P

arental guidance suggested

G

Ge

n

e

r

a

l

aud

i

e

n

ce

l

o

w

e

r

N

R

N

o ratin

g

[TV Rating

]

Rating Categor

y

TV

-

MA

M

ature audience only higher

TV-14

U

n

su

i

tab

l

e

f

o

r

c

hil

d

r

e

n

u

n

de

r 14

TV-P

G

P

arental guidance suggested

TV-

G

eneral au

d

ience

TV

-

Y

7

A

ppropriate for all children 7 and older

TV

-

Y

A

ppropriate for all children lower

Non

e

N

o rating

[Canadian English Rating

]

Ratin

g

Categor

y

1

8

+

A

dult audience only higher

14

+

U

nsuitable for ages under 1

4

P

G

P

arental guidance suggested

G

Ge

n

e

r

a

l

aud

i

e

n

ce

C

8

+

F

or children over 8

C

F

or all children lower

E

xempt program

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 110 2013/02/12 21:06:34

111

EN

Editing Function Setup

PlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Others Español

SETUPS

[Canadian French Rating

]

Rat

i

ng

C

ategor

y

1

8

ans+ A

d

u

l

t au

d

ience on

ly

h

ig

h

e

r

16ans+ Unsuitable for ages under 16

1

3a

n

s

+Unsuitable for ages under 13

8a

n

s+

Unsuitable for a

g

es under 8

G

General audienc

e

l

owe

r

E

xempt program

As for TV Rating’s TV-MA, TV-14, TV-PG, or TV-Y7, you

can further set the sub ratings to block specific

elements of programming. Press [K/ L

/

{

/

{

B

]

to select

the desired rating or sub rating, then press [OK]

repeatedly to switch between view and block. Sub

rating status will appear on the side of the main rating.

TV Rating

TV-MA

TV-14

TV-PG

TV-G

TV-Y7

TV-Y

None

FV V S L D

Sub Ratin

g

Categor

y

Rating

FV

Fantasy Vio

l

ence

T

V-Y

7

V

Vi

ole

n

ce

T

V-P

G

T

V-14

T

V-M

A

S

Sexual Situatio

n

L

Coarse Language

D

Suggestive Dialogu

e

T

V-PG

,

TV-14

Note

•

Changing the main rating to block or view

automaticall

y

changes all its sub ratings to the same

(

block or view

).

E

D

ownloadable Rating

Set the rating s

y

stem via digital broadcasting, or clear the

downloaded ratin

g

s

.

If the broadcastin

g

si

g

nal does not have the

d

ownloadable rating in

f

ormation, the message below

wi

ll

appear

.

Downloadable Rating is currently not available.

•

This message will also appear when you try to access

“

Downloadable Rating” a

f

ter you have cleared the

d

ownloadable rating information, and the new information has

n

ot been downloaded since.

To set the rating:

1

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired rating to set, then

press [OK] to show the levels for the rating.

2) Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a level, then press [OK] to

s

witch

b

etween view or

b

lock.

If

y

ou set one level to block, a ke

y

icon will appear and

all the higher levels will be blocked automatically

.

To clear the downloadable ratin

g

information and its

setting

:

1

)

Use

[

K

/

L] to select “Clear Rating Table”, then

p

ress

[

OK

]

.

2

)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

] to select “Yes”,then press [OK].

FChange Password

Change the current password

.

Use

[

the Number Buttons

]

to enter new access

passwor

d.

N

ote

•

W

hen you

f

orget the access password at step 1) on

page 110, enter 4737 us

i

ng

[

t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

i

n

the password input window. Password will be cleared

.

• Depending on the t

y

pe of rating s

y

stem,

y

ou ma

y

set

the levels individually.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 111 2013/02/12 21:06:34

1

2

EN

SETUPS

P

ress

[

STOP

C

]

i

f

you are playing back a disc

.

1

Press [MENU] and use [

K

/

L

] to select

“Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press [OK].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Video”

,

then

press [OK]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired item,

then press [OK]

.

Progressive Scan

TV Aspect

Video Input

1

2

3

Submenu will appear

.

4

Re

f

er to

1

t

o

2

on page 113 an

d

set

t

h

e se

l

ecte

d

item

.

• For

3

refer to page 56.

5

When you finish with setting, press

[MENU] to exit

.

Video

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 112 2013/02/12 21:06:34

1

3

EN

Editing Function Setup

PlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Others Español

1

Progressive Scan (Default : OFF)

T

h

is unit is compati

bl

e wit

h

t

h

e progressive scan s

y

stem.

The

f

eature provides you with higher de

f

inition images

t

h

an t

h

e tra

d

itiona

l

output system

d

oes. To uti

l

ize t

h

is

feature, you must set progressive scan mode to “ON”.

1) Use [K/

L

] to select “ON“, then press [OK].

Progressive Scan

ON

OFF

{

/

{

B

] to select “Yes“, then press [OK]

.

Activating progressive scan:

Check your TV has progressive scan

and connect with component video cable.

NOTE :

Activate? Yes No

If there is no picture or picture is

distorted after selecting “Yes”,

Wait about 15 seconds for auto recovery.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Yes“ within 15 seconds

,

then

p

ress [OK].

Your settin

g

will be activated

.

Note

•

I

f

your TV is compatible with progressive scan (480p),

you are recommended to use the HDMI or

component vi

d

eo ca

bl

e (commercia

ll

y avai

l

a

bl

e) to

connect this unit to the TV. (Re

f

er to pages 17-18.) I

f

not,

use t

h

e RCA vi

d

eo ca

bl

e an

d

set t

h

e progressive scan

to “OFF” or press an

d

h

o

ld

[

MENU

]

f

or more than 3

secon

d

s

d

uring HDD / DVD p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

•

When selecting “No” or not pressing an

y

buttons on the

unit or remote contro

l

wit

h

in 15 secon

d

s at step 3),

progressive scan remains to be “OFF” (interlace scan).

2

TV Aspect (Default: 4:3 Letter Box)

Use this feature to adjust the aspect ratio of the video

source which is different from your TV’s ratio to fit your T

V

monitor without distortin

g

the picture

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [OK].

TV Aspect

4:3 Letter Box

4:3 Pan & Scan

16:9 Wide

Setting o

f

TV Aspect

Aspect ratio of the video source

4

:3 16:

9

4

:3

P

a

n

&

Scan

16:9 Wi

d

e

I

f

you have a standard TV:

Select “4:3 Letter Box”, so that black bars a

pp

ear on the

top and bottom of the TV screen when pla

y

ing back a

wide-screen

p

icture. Select “4:3 Pan & Scan” for a full

height picture with both sides trimmed when pla

y

ing

back wide-screen

p

icture

.

I

f

you have a widescreen TV:

Se

l

ect

“1

6:

9 Wi

de

”

.

SETUPS

Note

•

Please contact TV manu

f

acturer i

f

y

ou have an

y

p

roblem with it.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 113 2013/02/12 21:06:34

114

EN

SETUPS

1

Press [MENU] in stop mo

d

e an

d

use

[

K

/

L

] to select “General Setting”,

t

h

en press [OK]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “HDMI”, t

h

en

press

[

OK

]

.

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

Channel

HDMI

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired item

,

then

p

ress [OK]

.

Format

HDMI Audio

RGB Range

fun-Link (HDMI CEC)

1

2

3

4

When you

f

inish with the setting,

press [MENU] to ex

i

t.

1Format (Default : RGB)

You can select the color s

p

ace for HDMI out

p

ut.

Set the appropriate color space for

y

our displa

y

device.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a setting, then press [OK].

• W

h

en t

h

e connecte

d

evice is not compati

bl

e wit

h

t

h

e Y

/

C

b/Cr, HDMI signal is output as RGB regardless o

f

the setting

.

Format

RGB

YCbCr

2

HDMI Audio (Default : ON)

If

y

ou do not want to output the audio through HDMI

(Such as when you digitally output the audio through the

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT jack to

y

our audio

s

y

stem, etc.),

y

ou can set the HDMI audio output off

.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a setting, then press [OK].

• Set to “OFF” when the HDMI sound is not out

p

ut.

HDMI Audio

ON

OFF

Your setting will be activated

.

HDMI

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 114 2013/02/12 21:06:34

1

5

EN

Editing Function Setup

PlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Others Español

3

RGB Range (Default : Normal)

You can adjust the RGB range to make the dark areas of

the HDMI images brighter

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [OK].

• Select “Enhanced“ if the black-white contrast is not clear.

• This setting is effective only for HDMI RGB output.

RGB Range

Normal

Enhanced

Your setting will be activated

.

4

fun-Link (HDMI CEC) (Default : OFF)

fun-Link (HDMI CEC)

ON

OFF

over HDMI and is part o

f

the HDMI standard.

W

hen “fun-Link (HDMI CEC)” setting is set to “ON”,

f

unctions listed below will be available

.

One Touch Pla

y

W

hen this unit is turned on, the TV also is turned on and

the a

pp

ro

p

riate external in

p

ut channel will be selected

a

utomaticall

y

. The appropriate external input channel

c

an also be selected on

y

our TV automaticall

y

, when

y

ou

p

ress

[

PLAY

B

]

,

[

G

]

,

[

H

]

,

[DISC MENU]

,

[

TIMER PROG.]

,

[DTV/TV]

,

[MENU]

,

[CHANNE

L

/

]

,

[the Number buttons]

o

r

[

DUBBING

]

wh

e

n

t

h

e

u

ni

t

’

s

p

ower is on.

Standb

y

Wh

en you press an

d

h

o

ld

[

S

TANDBY

/O

N

yy

]

f

o

r 2

seconds, it turns o

ff

the power to the standby mode o

f

the TV

f

irst and then turns the power o

ff

on this unit

a

lso

.

S

y

stem Information

Get & Set Menu Languag

e

T

his unit recognizes the language set

f

or the TV and

a

utomatica

ll

y sets t

h

e same

l

anguage on t

h

e p

l

ayer

menu language

f

or this unit.

SETUPS

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 115 2013/02/12 21:06:35

1

6

EN

TROUBLESHOOTING

Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing.

Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper operation.

Symptom Remedy

POWER

T

he power does not turn on

.

• Check that the AC power cord is connected securel

y.

• Remote Control batteries may be weak, replace them with new ones.

•

Leave the unit unplugged for 20-30 min, plug the unit back in. If the unit

does not power on please contact our customer service center for service

on the model

.

T

he unit turns on automatically

without an

y

operation

.

• The unit turns on automatically 2 seconds before the timer recording.

”

Language” menu appears every time

the power turns on

.

• The unit may not have been turned off correctly. Finish up the language setting

procedure by selecting a language in

”

L

anguage

”

menu. Press

[OK]

to activate the

setting, t

h

en press

[STANDBY/ON

yy

]

to turn t

h

e unit to t

h

e stan

db

y mo

d

e.

Do not disconnect the AC power cord before placing the unit in the standby mode

.

GENERAL

The unit does not response

.

• “ ” or error message appears if the operation is prohibited

.

• Remote Contro

l

b

atteries may

b

e wea

k

, rep

l

ace t

h

em wit

h

new ones.

•

Leave the unit unplugged

f

or 20-30 min, plug the unit back in. I

f

the unit

does not power on please contact our customer service center

f

or service

on the model

.

No picture, sound or menu appears on

t

h

e

sc

r

ee

n

.

• Depending on the Source/Connection, confirm the following

:

-For Antenna/Basic Ca

bl

e, re

d

o an Auto Scan on t

h

e mo

d

e

l

.

-For Sate

ll

ite Receiver/Ca

bl

e Box, c

h

ec

k

t

h

e connections to ma

k

e sure

th

ey are secure

l

y connecte

d.

-For RF Coaxial Cable, redo an Auto Scan on the model

.

-For RCA Audio/Video, check the connections to make sure the

y

are

s

ecurel

y

connected

.

• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.

• Check if the cables are dama

g

ed.

•

Check i

f

a correct external input channel is selected on

y

our TV. (Re

f

er to page 22.

)

• Check i

f

you have completed the channel setting. (Re

f

er to pages 29-31.

)

• While the setup menu or timer programming display is shown, or while the

screen saver is active

,

the audio is muted.

Clock setting and channel setting

cannot be

p

erformed

.

• If a recording is in progress, these operations cannot be performed

.

Time jumps/Auto Clock set’s incorrect

time

.

• Set the “Auto Clock Setting” to “OFF” on page 104 and try “Manual Cloc

k

Setting” on page 34

.

T

h

e unit

d

oes not operate proper

l

y

.

•

Moisture

h

as con

d

ense

d

insi

d

e t

h

e unit. Remove t

h

e

d

isc an

d

l

eave t

h

e unit

turned on

f

or about 2 hours until the moisture evaporates. (Re

f

er to page 3.)

“Repairin

g

” appears on the TV screen

.

Repairing

• I

f

there is a power

f

ailure or unplugging during recording,

f

inalizing,

f

ormatting or editing (even a

f

ter “Repairing” disappears), a repairing

process will begin automatically just a

f

ter turning the unit on again.

It may take several minutes up to several hours

.

In case you intend to cancel the

repa

i

r

i

ng process

.

Repairing

Do you want to cancel a repairing

process? When selecting “Yes”,

the disc may not be usable.

Yes

No

• I

f

you intend to cancel the repairing process, press

[

A

OPEN/CLOSE

]

on the

f

ront panel, then select “Yes” and press [OK]. A

f

ter that, press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to take out the

d

isc. The disc cancelled during the

repairing process MAY NOT work

.

T

h

e c

l

oc

k

d

isp

l

ay

d

oes not appear in

the front panel display

.

• C

h

ec

k

t

h

at t

h

e AC power cor

d

is connecte

d

secure

l

y

.

• (In case of power failure) Check the breaker and clock settin

g.

W

hen you forget the password for

p

arental lock. • Please cancel the password and the set level. (Refer to pa

g

e 106.

)

No analo

g

TV closed captions are

out

p

ut

.

• If you are using HDMI connection to watch the TV programs through

this unit, analog TV closed caption cannot be output. Try using another

out

p

ut connection to the TV

.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 116 2013/02/12 21:06:35

117

EN

Function Setup Others

EditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Remedy

GENERAL

DV si

g

na

l

cannot

b

e input. • Before connection, turn on the power supplies for both this unit and the

DVC, an

d

ma

k

e sure t

h

at t

h

ese units

h

ave sto

pp

e

d.

• Only a “DVC-SD” signal can be input

f

rom the DVC to this unit. Other

types o

f

signals are not supported

.

• Do not connect an

y

device other than the DVC. Even if a recorder or PC

with another DV terminal is connected, the DV function will not operate

.

• I

f

the DVC is not recognized a

f

ter connection, turn o

ff

the power supply

f

or the unit and re-connect the DVC

.

T

he DVC cannot be operated with this

u

ni

t.

• Signal input or DVC operation from this unit may be disabled

depending on the type of DVC

.

• If a DVC signal cannot be input, use an external input (L1/L2) for analog

connection via audio/video cables

.

• DVC control may be disabled depending on the type o

f

DVC, even in a

mode other than camera mode. In this case, switch to HDD/DVD control

an

d

execute t

h

e norma

l

recor

d

ing proce

d

ure w

h

i

l

e operating t

h

e DVC

.

Ce

r

ta

in f

u

n

ct

i

o

n

s

o

f

t

h

e

DV

C

ca

nn

ot

operate

.

• Some functions may not operate depending on the type of DVC. For

example, if the DVC does not support slow playback mode, the slow

playback function is disabled

.

• With L3(DV-IN), the disc display menu does not appear unless disc

pla

y

back is executed

.

DV audio signal cannot be switched. • For recording with the DVC, the recording audio signal can be set to 12

b

its or 16

b

its. However, w

h

en 16-

b

it recor

d

ing mo

d

e is se

l

ecte

d

, au

d

io

signal cannot be switched. To record an audio signal, set it to 12 bits.

No image from HDMI connection

.

• Check the HDMI connection.

(

Check the status of the HDMI related

indications.

)

• C

h

ec

k

w

h

et

h

er t

h

e connecte

d

monitor

d

evice or ot

h

er

d

evice supports

HDCP. (This unit will not output a video signal unless the other device

supports HDCP.

)

• Check the setting of HDMI

.

• Check whether the out

p

ut format of this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches

the su

pp

orted in

p

ut format of other connected device

.

• If above remedies do not work, unplug the HDMI cable and the AC

power cords, then plug them back in the order of 1: HDMI cable, 2: AC

p

ower cord

.

S

etup menu cannot be called up

.

• Setup menus cannot be called up during DVD recording.

•

P

ress

[

STOP C

]

on the remote control, and then press

[

MENU

]

.

CHANNEL

TV channels cannot be chan

g

ed

.

• Check if the connections are made securel

y

and correctl

y.

• Check i

f

the cables are damaged.

• Try channel setting by

f

ollowing the steps on

pages

29

-

3

1

.

Onl

y

specific channels do not appear

.

• The channels ma

y

be set to be skipped. (Refer to pages 30-31.

)

T

he external in

p

ut channels (such as

L1, L2 or L3) cannot be skipped

.

• This unit does not ski

p

the external in

p

ut channels. This is not a

mal

f

unction

.

T

he unit is not picking up my channels

f

rom the Auto Scan.

• Check the Connections. Con

f

irm the main source

f

rom the Antenna

/

Basic Cable/Cable Box/Satellite Receiver is connected to the ANTENNA

IN by an “RF Coaxial” Cable. If not using the “RF Coaxial” cable and using

an S-Video or RCA Audio/Video cable, the unit will need to be set on L1

or

L

2

.

RECORDING

GENERAL

T

he ima

g

e from the external device

c

annot be displa

y

ed or recorded

.

• Try pressing

[

SOURCE

]

repeatedly.

• T

u

rn

o

n

a

ll

co

nn

ected

de

vi

ces.

• Check if the connections are made securel

y

and correctl

y.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 117 2013/02/12 21:06:35

1

8

EN

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Remedy

RECORDING

HDD / DVD

U

n

able

to

R

eco

r

d.

• It is prohibited to make a recordin

g

f

rom 2 minutes be

f

ore the

pro

g

rammed start time o

f

a timer recordin

g.

• T

h

is unit cannot recor

d

programs t

h

at contain cop

y

protection signa

l

.

Thi

s

i

s

n

ot

a

m

a

l

fu

n

ct

i

o

n

.

• The space o

f

the recording media ma

y

be used up. Tr

y

deleting

unnecessary titles, or exchange it with the recordable media

.

• The maximum number of titles or chapters has exceeded. Delete the

unnecessary titles to make enough space or insert a new recordable media.

• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly

.

Timer recording cannot be

performed

.

• The internal clock of the unit may have been stopped due to a power

outa

g

e. Reset the Clock Settin

g

(Refer to pa

g

es 32-34.

)

•

If using a Cable Box or Satellite receiver it may have been turned off at

the time of the recording. Please check, if there are any Timing options

for the Cable Box or Satellite receiver to turn On, if none please make sure

the receiver is turned On and set to the channel you wish to record

.

•

Check the Timer Recording menu for any Recording errors, if there is an

error look at the Recordin

g

Error Code Listin

g

(refer to pa

g

e 50)

.

HDD

The picture of the autostart

recor

d

ing

d

isappears

.

• The contents of the autostart recording will be cleared in some cases

(Changing input channel etc.). Refer to page 46.

Wh

en p

l

aying

b

ac

k

t

h

e tit

l

e

recorded

f

rom the autostart

recor

d

ing, t

h

e DTV program

in

f

ormation is displayed and it

c

annot

b

e remove

d

.

• In t

h

e autostart recor

d

ing, w

h

en you

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e DTV program

in

f

ormation, the in

f

ormation will be recorded as the part o

f

the picture

.

DVD

U

n

ab

l

e

to

R

eco

r

d.

• Check to see if the disc is format to this unit. If used in a PC or any other

device, it may not allow any recordings

.

• For DVD+RW/DVD-RW, tr

y

“Erase Disc” for reformatting (Refer to page 99)

.

• Copy-once programs cannot be recorded on DVD. This is not a

m

a

lf

u

n

ct

i

o

n

.

• Check if the disc is protected or  nalized. Undo the protection or the

 nalization. (Refer to page 64 and 65.)

• DVD-RW

o

n

ce

f

o

rm

atted

o

n

a

n

ot

h

e

r

u

ni

t

ca

nn

ot

be

r

eco

r

ded

o

n

t

hi

s

u

ni

t

u

nl

ess

a

ll

t

h

e

co

n

te

n

ts

in

t

h

e

d

i

sc

a

r

e

r

ased.

• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.

Th

e

in

d

i

cat

i

o

n

“

Writing to Disc 100%

d

oes not disappear

.

•“ Writing to Disc 100%

ma

y

remain on screen

f

or the maximum

o

f

20 seconds even a

f

ter it reached 100

%

. This is not a mal

f

unction.

PLAYBACK

GENERAL

TV aspect ratio does not match

your TV screen

.

• Check the TV aspect ratio. (Refer to page 113.)

• A di erent aspect ratio will be used when the aspect ratio speci ed by

the disc is not supported by this unit

.

Pla

y

back picture is distorted

.

Color of the picture is abnormal

.

• During fast forward or fast reverse, pla

y

back picture ma

y

be distorted.

Thi

s

i

s

n

ot

a

m

a

lf

u

n

ct

i

o

n

.

• Connect to TV directly. When you connect this unit with the television

via VCR or other devices, the picture may be distorted due to the copy-

protection signal

.

• Check if the cables are dama

g

ed.

• Keep the equipment which may cause electrical disturbances, such as a

cellular phone, awa

y

from the unit

.

Th

e

r

e

i

s

n

o

sou

n

d

o

r n

o

subt

i

t

l

e.

• T

u

rn

o

n

a

ll

co

nn

ected

de

vi

ces.

• Check if the external input channel is set correctly.

• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly

.

• If using the HDMI connection, sound is not output when “HDMI Audio”

is set to “OFF”

.

• Check the RCA audio cable connection. If you are using HDMI-DVI

conversion cable, you must connect the RCA audio cable, too.

• If usin

g

the HDMI connection, check whether the output format of this

unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches the su

pp

orted in

p

ut format of the other

connected device

.

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 118 2013/02/12 21:06:35

1

9

EN

Function Setup Others

EditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Remedy

PLAYBACK

HDD/DVD

Playback does not start

f

rom the

b

eginning

.

• Resume

f

unction may be activated. Re

f

er to page 74 to cancel the resume

po

i

nt

.

HDD

HDD playback suddenly stops.

• When DVD recording finishes during HDD playback, the unit will stop the

HDD playback and start writing data to the DVD. This is not a malfunction

.

DVD

Playback cannot be performed

.

• Check if the playable disc is inserted

.

• Check i

f

the disc is loaded correctly with the labeled side

f

acing up.

• Discs ma

d

e on ot

h

er

d

evices or on persona

l

computers cannot

b

e

played back on this unit unless it is  nalized on the device.

Even i

f

it is



nalized, the per

f

ormance o

f

those discs are not guaranteed

on t

h

is unit

.

• The disc may be dirty or  awed. Clean the disc

.

• Check if all the connections are made correctly.

• Check the parental lock setting. (Re

f

er to page 106.)

• Playback of DVD is prohibited from 2 minutes before the programmed

start time of a timer recording when the recording media is DVD.

T

here is no sound or no subtitle

.

• Check if “Disc Audio” is set correctly. (Refer to page 107.)

• There is a possibilit

y

that the selected subtitle language is not

supported by the disc.

Digita

l

au

d

io setting cannot

b

e

c

hanged to main audio (L), sub

audio

(

R

)

or combination of both

.

• I

f

the audio source is in the Dolby Digital

f

ormat, set the Dolby Digital

Setting to “PCM” in “Playback” menu. (available only

f

or DVD) (Re

f

er to

page 107.)

Audio language or the subtitle

language o

f

the DVD cannot be

c

hanged

.

• Multilingual subtitles are not supported by the disc.

• Some audio languages or the subtitle languages can be changed only

f

rom the disc menu. Please refer to the disc’s manual

.

DVD

C

amera angles cannot be changed

.

• Even though the multi-angle feature is supported b

y

the disc, that does

not mean all the scenes are shot from multi-angles. Changing angles are

available onl

y

for those scenes shot from the multi-angle

.

Th

e

d

isc cannot

b

e p

l

a

y

e

d

b

ac

k

on

another player even though it is

finalized properly

.

• Some DVD p

l

a

y

ers

d

o not p

l

a

y

b

ac

k

t

h

e

d

isc ma

d

e on anot

h

er recor

d

er.

Re

f

er to the manual o

f

the unit.

DUBBING

HDD / DVD

Dubbing cannot be executed. • When the number of the titles or the chapters exceeds the maximum

recor

d

a

bl

e num

b

er, t

h

e

d

u

bb

ing wi

ll

not

b

e execute

d

.

• Dubbing o

f

a “copy-once only” program is not possible with this

unit. ”This program is not allowed to be recorded.” appears when the

program is copyrighted for one-time recording only.

DVD

Dubbing cannot be executed. • Check i

f

the disc is compatible

f

or recording (re

f

er to page 41).

EDITING

HDD / DVD

T

itles cannot

b

e e

d

ite

d

or

d

elete

d.

• The titles or the disc itsel

f

may be protected. Cancel the protection by

f

ollowing the steps on page 95 for title protection and page 64 for disc

protection

.

DVD

T

i

t

l

es

ca

nn

ot

be

ed

i

ted

o

r

de

l

eted.

• Check to see if the disc ma

y

have been finalized. The titles in the

DVD+R/-R cannot be edited or deleted if they are  nalized. If using a

DVD-RW disc, try the “Undo Finalize” option. (Refer to page 65.

)

T

he capacity o

f

the disc doesn’t

i

n

c

r

ease

e

v

e

n if

t

h

e

r

eco

r

ded

program is deleted.

• With DVD+RW/-RW, the disc space will increase only when the last title

is deleted. With DVD-R/+R, deletin

g

a title will not increase the disc

sp

ace

.

REMOTE CONTROL

T

he remote control does not function

.

• No batteries in the remote or the batteries may be weak. Replace the batteries.

• M

a

k

e

su

r

e

t

h

e

r

e

i

s

n

o

obstac

l

e

bet

w

ee

n

t

h

e

r

e

m

ote

a

n

d

t

h

e

u

ni

t.

• Try getting closer to the unit. (Refer to page 12.)

• Please check IR si

g

nal. (Refer to pa

g

e 4.

)

• Cannot guarantee about 3rd part

y

’s remote controls. Please contact the

remote manufacturer if you have any problem with it

.

• If above solutions do not solve the problem, please call our customer support

at 1-800-605-8610 or visit www.ma

g

navox.com/support for additional

a

ssistant.

Instructions continue on the next page.

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 119 2013/02/12 21:06:35

1

2

0

EN

Error message Cause Solution

D

i

sc

Err

o

r

—

Please e

j

ect the disc. —

Playback feature may not be available on

this Disc

.

•

Unplayable disc is inserted in the unit.

•

The disc is u

p

side down.

• Insert a standardized playable disc

which bear the Logos on page 67

.

• Insert the

d

isc with the la

b

ele

d

si

d

e

facing up

.

Re

g

ion Error

—

Please eject the disc. —

Pla

y

back is not authorized in

y

our region.

•

Pla

y

back is not authorized in the region

of the DVD-video which

y

ou inserted in

t

h

e

u

ni

t.

• Insert the DVD-video with re

g

ion codes

1

o

r ALL

.

Parenta

l

Loc

k

On

T

h

e current se

l

ecte

d

parenta

l

eve

l

prohibits playback.

•

T

h

e current se

l

ecte

d

parenta

l

eve

l

pro

h

i

b

its p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

• C

h

ec

k

“Parenta

l

Loc

k

” setting in

“P

l

ay

b

ac

k

” menu (page 106).

Recording Error

This program is not allowed to be

recorded.

•

The recording function encountered a

copy protection program.

•

Copy-righted programs cannot be

recorded on this unit at any time. The

unit will stop recording at any point and

will display the message. Please contact

your programming provider for type o

f

copy protection applied to program

.

Recording Error

This program is not recordable in +VR

mo

d

e.

•

You are trying to record the copy-once

program.

• You cannot record the copy-once

program.

Recor

d

ing Error

Cannot recor

d

on t

h

is

d

isc.

•

You are trying to recor

d

onto t

h

e

d

isc

w

h

ic

h

is unrecor

d

a

bl

e or t

h

e

d

isc status

is una

bl

e to recor

d

.

•

T

h

e

d

isc is

d

irty.

•

T

h

e

d

isc is

d

amage

d

.

• Insert t

h

e recor

d

a

bl

e

d

isc an

d

ensure

the disc status satisfies the recording

requirements

(

page 41

)

.

• C

l

ean t

h

e

d

isc wit

h

a c

l

eaning c

l

ot

h

.

• Rep

l

ace t

h

e

d

isc

.

Recor

d

ing Error

T

h

is

d

isc is protecte

d

an

d

not recor

d

a

bl

e.

•

Y

ou are trying to recor

d

on to t

h

e protecte

d

isc w

h

ic

h

is set in “Disc E

d

it” menu.

• Re

l

ease t

h

e

d

isc protect setting in “Disc

E

d

it” menu (page 64)

.

Recording Error

Disc is full.

(

No area for new recording

)

•

You are trying to record onto the disc

which has no space for recording

.

• Insert a recordable disc with enough

recording space.

Recording Error

You cannot recor

d

more than 49 titles on

one

d

isc.

(

The maximum is 49

)

•

You are trying to record onto the disc

on which the number o

f

recording titles

comes up to the maximum (49).

• Delete unnecessary titles (pages 85-86)

.

Recording Error

You cannot record more than 254 cha

p

ters

o

n

o

n

e

d

i

sc.

(

The maximum is 254

)

•

You are tr

y

ing to record onto the

DVD+RW

o

r DVD-RW

o

n whi

c

h

t

h

e

number of recording chapters comes

u

p

to the maximum (254).

• Delete unnecessar

y

chapter marks

(pages 90-91)

.

Recor

d

ing Error

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

o

n

th

i

s

d

i

sc

as

P

o

w

e

r

Ca

li

b

r

at

i

o

n Ar

ea

i

s

f

u

ll

.

•

When recordings are performed

repeate

dl

y onto an unsta

bl

e

d

isc, t

h

is

area may become full.

•

E

very time you insert a disc for recording,

t

he disc’s workin

g

area will be taken up.

And if

y

ou repeat this frequentl

y

, it will

b

e used up sooner and

y

ou ma

y

not be

a

ble to record the

f

ull 49 titles

.

• In

se

r

t

a

n

e

w

d

i

sc.

• If using a DVD+RW/DVD-RW try to

format the disc by “Erasing Disc” (Refer

to pa

g

e 99

).

Recor

d

ing Error

This disc is already

f

inalized

.

•

You are trying to recor

d

onto t

h

e

d

isc

already

f

inalized.

• Release the

f

inalizing

f

or this disc

(

page 65

)

.

Recordin

g

Error

The disc has no recording compatibilit

y

.

Set “Make Recording Compatible” to

“ON” to convert the

d

isc.

•

You are tr

y

ing to record onto the

d

isc that had been recorded b

y

other

recor

d

ers.

• Set “Make Recordin

g

Compatible” to

“ON” to rewrite the menu, after that

y

ou

will record to disc (page 43).

Recor

d

ing Error

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

m

o

r

e

tha

n 999

t

i

tles

on HDD.

(

T

h

e maximum is 999

)

.

•

You are trying to recor

d

onto t

h

e HDD

w

h

en tota

l

tit

l

e num

b

er is a

l

rea

d

y at its

l

imit.

• De

l

ete unnecessary tit

l

es (pages 85-87)

.

Recordin

g

Error

Ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

o

n

t

hi

s

HDD

.

•

The internal HDD is dirt

y

or damaged.

•

There is not enou

g

h space on the

in

te

rn

a

l HDD

.

•

Co

n

tact

t

h

e

custo

m

e

r

se

rvi

ce

n

te

r

.

• Delete unnecessar

y

titles (pages 85-87)

.

*

If you are still having trouble with the unit after checking “TROUBLESHOOTING”, write down the error code and the

e

rror description for calling our help line mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized Service Center

.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Message

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 120 2013/02/12 21:06:35

12

1

EN

Function Setup Others

EditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

LANGUAGE CODE

Language Code

A

b

kh

a

zi

an

474

8

A

fa

r

4747

A

f

rikaan

s

475

2

Al

ba

ni

an

6563

Amhari

c

475

9

Ar

ab

i

c

47

64

Armen

i

a

n

5471

Assames

e

476

5

Aymar

a

4

77

1

Azerbai

j

an

i

4

77

2

Bashki

r

484

7

B

asqu

e

516

7

Ben

g

ali;Ban

g

l

a

4860

Bhutan

i

507

2

Bihar

i

4854

Bi

s

l

a

m

a

4

855

B

reto

n

4

8

6

4

Bulgaria

n

4

8

5

3

B

urmes

e

5

9

71

Byelorussia

n

4

851

Ca

m

bod

i

an

5

7

59

Catala

n

4

9

4

7

C

hines

e

725

4

Co

r

s

i

can

49

61

C

roatia

n

54

64

C

z

ech

49

65

D

a

ni

sh

50

4

7

Dutc

h

6

0

5

8

Englis

h

516

0

Esperant

o

5

1

61

E

sto

ni

an

5

1

66

F

aroes

e

5261

Fi

ji

5

2

56

Finni

sh

5

2

55

Frenc

h

5

2

64

Fr

i

s

i

a

n

5271

Galicia

n

5

3

5

8

G

eorgia

n

574

7

G

erma

n

5

0

51

Gree

k

515

8

Greenlandi

c

575

8

G

uaran

i

5

3

6

0

Gujarat

i

5367

Haus

a

544

7

Hebre

w

556

9

Hind

i

545

5

Language Code

Hun

g

aria

n

5

4

67

I

ce

l

a

n

d

i

c

5565

Indonesia

n

556

0

Interlin

g

u

a

55

4

7

Interlingu

e

555

1

Inupiak

5557

Iris

h

5347

Italian 556

6

Japanese

56

47

J

avanese 566

9

Kannad

a

5760

Kas

h

mir

i

5765

Kazakh 575

7

Kinyarwand

a

6

46

9

Kirghi

z

5771

Kir

u

n

di

6

4

60

Korea

n

5761

Kurdish 576

7

Laothia

n

58

61

L

at

in

58

47

Latvian

;

Lettish

5868

Lingal

a

58

6

0

Lithuania

n

5

8

6

M

acedo

ni

an

5

9

57

Malagas

y

5

95

3

Malay

5

9

65

Malayala

m

5

9

58

Maltes

e

59

6

Maor

i

59

5

M

a

r

at

h

i

5

9

6

4

M

o

l

da

vi

an

5

9

6

1

Mongolia

n

5

96

0

N

au

r

u

60

47

Nepal

i

6051

Norwegia

n

60

61

O

ccita

n

6

149

Oriya

6

164

Oromo (A

f

an)

6

15

9

Panja

bi

62

47

Pashto; Pushto

6

265

P

ersian 5

2

47

Polish

62

5

8

Portugues

e

6

2

66

Q

uechu

a

63

6

7

Rhaeto-Romanc

e

6

45

9

R

omania

n

6

4

6

1

Language Code

Russ

i

a

n

6

4

67

Sa

m

oa

n

6559

S

angh

o

655

3

Sa

n

s

kri

t

65

4

7

S

cots Gaelic 5

3

5

0

Se

r

b

i

a

n

656

4

S

erbo-Croatia

n

6554

S

esotho

6

566

Sets

w

a

n

a

6660

S

hon

a

6

560

S

indhi 6550

S

ing

h

a

l

es

e

6

555

S

iswat

6

565

S

lovak

6

55

7

S

lovenia

n

6558

So

m

a

li

656

1

Sp

anish 5165

S

undanes

e

6

56

7

S

wahil

i

656

9

S

w

ed

i

s

h

6568

T

a

g

alo

g

6658

T

ajik 665

3

T

ami

l

6

64

7

Tata

r

6666

T

elugu

66

51

T

h

a

i

665

4

T

i

beta

n4

861

T

igrin

ya

66

5

T

onga

666

1

T

son

ga

6665

Tu

rki

s

h

666

4

T

urkme

n

66

5

7

T

w

i

666

9

U

kr

a

ini

a

n

6

7

57

U

r

d

u

6

7

6

4

U

z

b

e

k

677

2

V

ietnames

e

68

55

V

o

l

apu

k

68

61

W

e

l

s

h

4

9

71

W

olof

6

961

X

hosa 7

0

5

4

Y

iddish 5655

Yo

r

uba

71

6

1

Z

ulu 726

7

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 121 2013/02/12 21:06:35

122

EN

A

na

l

o

g

Au

d

io

g

An electrical signal that directly represents sound.

Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical

signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also

“

Digital Audio”

.

A

s

p

ect Rati

o

p

T

he width of a TV screen relative to its height.

Conventiona

l

TVs are 4:3 (in ot

h

er wor

d

s, t

h

e TV screen

i

s almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the TV

screen is a

l

most twice as wi

d

e as it is

h

ig

h

).

Block Noise

A distortion of di

g

ital ima

g

es in the shape of blocks

c

aused by the application of data compression

.

Cha

p

ter (HDD/DVD)

p

J

ust as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on

HDD/DVD is usually divided into chapters. See also “Title”

.

Com

p

onent Video Out

p

ut

pp

Each signal of luminance (Y) and component (P

B

/

C

B

,

P

R

/

C

R

) is independent to output so that you can experience

picture color as it is.

A

l

so,

d

ue to compati

b

i

l

ity wit

h

progressive vi

d

eo (480p),

you can experience higher-density picture than that in

i

nter

l

ace (480i)

.

Di

g

ital Audio

g

An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During

recor

d

ing, t

h

e soun

d

is measure

d

at

d

iscrete interva

l

s

(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-

t

o-digital converter, generating a stream of numbers.

On p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, a

d

igita

l

-to-ana

l

og converter generates

a

n ana

l

og signa

l

b

ase

d

on t

h

ese num

b

ers. See a

l

so

“

Samp

l

ing Frequency” an

d

“Ana

l

og Au

d

io”

.

Do

lby

Di

g

ita

l

yg

T

he s

y

stem to compress digital sound developed b

y

Dolb

y

Laboratories. It offers

y

ou sound of stereo(2ch) or

m

u

l

t

i

c

h

a

nn

e

l

aud

i

o.

Finalize

T

o ma

k

e DVD, w

h

ic

h

ave

b

een recor

d

e

d

on, possi

bl

e to

p

l

ay

b

ac

k

in DVD p

l

ayers. Wit

h

t

h

is unit, it is possi

bl

e to

f

in

a

liz

e

DVD+R, DVD-RW, and DVD-

R

.

HDMI (hi

g

h definition multimedia interface

)

g

A digital interface between audio and video source. It can

t

ransmit component video, audio, and control signal with

o

n

e

cab

l

e

co

nn

ect

i

o

n

.

JPEG (joint photographic experts group)

jpgp pgp

J

PEG is a method of compressing still image files. You can

c

opy JPEG files from your personal computer to a disc,

a

nd play them back on this unit.

PB

C

(

pl

a

yb

ac

k

contro

l

py

)

(vi

d

eo CD on

ly

y

)

T

his function enables

y

ou to pla

y

back interactive

software usin

g

a menu screen. See also “Video CD”.

PCM (

p

u

l

se co

d

e mo

d

u

l

ation)

p

The most common system of encoding digital audio,

f

ound on CD and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a

lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital

and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio

recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amplifiers with

d

igital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and

MPEG audio to PCM. See also “Digital Audio”

.

Pro

g

ressive Scan (480

p)

gp

A type of display that does not split each frame into

f

ields, and instead scans directly through all the scan lines

of each frame in order. Progressive scan provides less

f

lickering and higher image resolution than traditional

(480i) TV signals. Refer to page 113 for instructions on

selective progressive scan mode.

Re

g

ion Code

g

Regions associate discs and players with particular areas

of the world. This unit will only play back discs that have

compatible region codes. You can find the region code

of

y

our unit b

y

looking on the rear panel. Some discs are

compatible with more than one re

g

ion (or all re

g

ions).

Sam

p

lin

g

Fre

q

uenc

y

pg q y

The rate which sound is measured b

y

a speci

f

ied interval

to turn into digital audio data. The numbers o

f

sampling

in one second de

f

ines as sampling

f

requency. The higher

the rate, the better the sound qualit

y

.

S

AP

(

secondar

y

audio

p

ro

g

ram

)

ypg

Sub-audio channel which is delivered separately

f

rom

main-au

d

io channel. This au

d

io channel is use

d

as an

a

l

ternate in

b

i

l

ingua

l

b

roa

d

casting

.

S-Video Out

p

ut

p

It delivers independently each signal o

f

color(C) and

l

uminance(Y) to TV as vi

d

eo signa

l

s, so t

h

at

h

ig

h

er-qua

l

ity

picture wi

ll

b

e gaine

d

.

Title (HDD/DVD)

A collection of cha

p

ters on HDD/DVD. See also “Cha

p

ter”

.

Trac

k

Audio CD use tracks to divide up the content o

f

a

d

isc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also

“C

h

apter”

.

Vi

deo

C

D

A digital

f

ormat

f

or store video data in compact disc

.

+VR Mo

d

e

+VR Mode is a recording format for DVD+RW/DVD+R/

DVD-RW

/

DVD-R discs

.

This format allows disc editing feature to be available in

ou

r r

eco

r

de

r

.

GLOSSARY

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 122 2013/02/12 21:06:36

1

2

3

EN

Function Setup Others

EditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

SPECIFICATIONS

Not

e

• The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.

General

H

DD

M

DR

533

H

:

3

2

0

GB MDR

535

H

:

500

GB MDR

53

7H

:

1 T

B

Power requirement

s

120V AC +/- 10%, 60Hz +/- 5%

P

ower consumptio

n

33W (standb

y

: 5.7W

)

Dimensions (width x hei

g

ht x depth

)

16.6 x 2.5 x 11.5 inches

(

420 x 61.2 x 290mm

)

Weigh

t

M

DR533H: 6.62 lbs. ( 3.00k

g

) MDR535H: 6.62 lbs. ( 3.00k

g

)

M

DR537H: 7.28 lbs. ( 3.30k

g

)

g

Operatin

g

temperatur

e

41°F

(

5°C

)

to 104°F

(

40°C

)

Operating humidit

y

Less than 80%

(

no condensation

)

T

V syste

m

ATSC

/

NTSC-M TV standar

d

Recording

f

ormat +VR (video recording)

f

ormat

Recording discs DVD+Rewritable, DVD+Recordabl

e

DVD-Rewritable, DVD-Recordable (+VR mode onl

y

)

y

Video recording forma

t

S

ampling

f

requenc

y

Compression forma

t

13.5

MH

z

M

PEG

2

A

udio recording forma

t

S

ampling frequenc

y

Compression

f

orma

t

48 kH

z

Dolby Digita

l

Tuner

T

un

i

ng system Channel

f

requency synthesized tuning syste

m

Channel coverage (ATSC / NTSC)

Te

rr

est

ri

al

C

a

b

l

e

V

HF 2~13, UHF 14~6

9

2~13, A~W, W+1~W+94 (analog W+1~W+84), A-5~A1, 5A

Terminals

Front

Audio inpu

t

R

CA

j

ack x

2

j

2V rms (in

p

ut im

p

edance: more than 22kΩ)

pp

V

i

d

eo input

R

CA

j

ack x 1

j

1V

p

-

p

(

75Ω

)

pp

S-Video input

M

ini DIN 4-

p

in x 1

p

Y: 1V

p

-

p

(75Ω) C: 286mV

p

-

p

(75Ω

)

pp pp

DV

i

npu

t

D

V input jac

k

(4 pin)

I

EEE 139

4

Rear

V

HF/UHF/Cable TV in

p

ut and out

p

ut

F

-t

yp

e

yp

7

5

Ω

u

n

ba

l

a

n

ced

Au

d

io inpu

t

R

CA

j

ac

k

x

2

j

2V rms (in

p

ut im

p

e

d

ance: more t

h

an 22

k

Ω)

pp

Audio outpu

t

R

CA

j

ack x

2

j

2V rms (out

p

ut im

p

edance: more than 1kΩ)

pp

V

i

d

eo input

R

CA

j

ack x 1

j

1V

p

-

p

(

75Ω

)

pp

V

ideo outpu

t

R

CA

j

ack x 1

j

1V

p

-

p

(

75Ω

)

pp

S-Video input

M

ini

D

IN 4-

p

in x 1

p

Y: 1V

p

-

p

(

75Ω

)

C: 286mV

p

-

p

(

75Ω

)

pp pp

S-Video output

M

ini

D

IN 4-

p

in x 1

p

Y: 1V

p

-

p

(75Ω) C: 286mV

p

-

p

(75Ω

)

pp pp

Component video outpu

t

R

CA

j

ack x 3 Y: 1V

p

-

p

(75Ω) P

B

/

C

B

: 700mV

p

-

p

(75Ω)

P

R

/

C

R

: 700mV

p

-

p

(75Ω)

Coaxial digital audio output

R

CA

j

ack x 1 500mVp-p (75Ω

)

H

D

MI outpu

t

H

DMI jack x 1

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 123 2013/02/12 21:06:36

124

E

S

ESPAÑOL

LogotiposDiscos reproducibles

CD-DA (CD de audio)

CD de video

CD-RW

CD-R

DVD-video

DVD+RW

DVD+R

DVD-RW

(Sólo discos en modo de video nalizados)

DVD-R

(Sólo discos en modo de video nalizados)

SoportesArchivos reproducibles

DVD+RW/+R

DVD-RW/-R

CD-RW/-R

JPEG

KODAK Picture CD

es una marca registrada de

DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

Este aparato es compatible con la reproducción de los

siguientes discos y archivos.

Este aparato puede grabar a DVD+RW, DVD+R, DVD-RW y

DVD-R

.

Los discos DVD+R/DVD-R pueden ser grabados sólo una

vez. Los discos DVD+RW/DVD-RW pueden ser grabados

y

bo

rr

ados

m

uc

h

as

v

eces.

En este aparato los discos DVD-RW/-R serán grabados

automáticamente en el modo DVD+VR

.

Logotipos Atributos

Disco de 8 cm / 12 cm, un solo lado,

una sola capa

Tiempo de grabación máx. aprox.

(modo SLP):

360 minutos (4,7 GB) (para 12 cm)

108 minutos (1,4 GB) (para 8 cm)

DVD+RW DVD+R

DVD-RW DVD-R

• Los siguientes discos se recomiendan para obtener una

buena calidad de grabación y han sido comprobados

como compatibles con este aparato. Sin embargo, según

sea la condición del medio el equipo podría no leer el

d

i

sco

co

rr

ecta

m

e

n

te.

Verbatim DVD+R 8x, DVD+RW 4x,

DVD-R 8x, DVD-RW 2x

JV

C

DVD-RW 4x

Maxell DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD-R 8x/16x

SONY DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD+RW 4x

TDK DVD+R 4x

/

8x

/

16x

El comportamiento de cualquier otro disco no está

garantiza

d

o

.

•

Usted

p

uede re

p

roducir discos DVD+RW en la

ma

y

oría de los reproductores de DVD sin finalizarlos.

Sin embar

g

o, si usted ha añadido o eliminado

capítulos, u ocultado capítulos, debe e

j

ecutar

“Com

p

atibilizar edic.” antes de

p

oder ver dichos

efectos en otros equipos. (Consulte la pá

g

ina 100.) Para

reproducir discos que no sean DVD+RW en otros

reproductores de DVD, usted necesitará finalizarlos.

(Consulte la página 65.)

El número presente en el interior

el

g

lobo se refiere a una re

g

ión

del mundo.Este a

p

arato

p

uede

reproducir discos DVD que estén

rotulados para ALL las re

g

iones o

para la re

g

ión 1.

• Un DVD-RW grabado en un modo distinto de +VR no

será grabable en este aparato a menos que usted borre

todo el contenido del disco. (Consulte la página 99.)

• Un DVD-R grabado en un modo distinto de +VR no será

grabable en este aparato

.

Discos Reproducibles Disco Grabable

Códigos de Región

Disco no Grabable

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 124 2013/02/12 21:06:36

Function Setup OthersEditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

1

25

ES

ESPAÑOL

Cables suministrados:

• cable coaxial de RF x 1 • cable RCA de audio (L/R) x 1 • cable RCA de vídeo x 1

Por favor, compre el resto de los cables necesarios en su tienda local.

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

Y

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

ANTENNA

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

cable RCA de audio

cable RCA de vídeo

parte trasera de la unidad

ANT. IN

antena de

VHF / UHF

empresa de

TV por cable

cable

coaxial

de RF

o

cable

coaxial de RF

AUDIO IN

L

R

VIDEO IN

Esta conexión es de Pasar a

través de la televisión solamente

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

R

L

COAXIAL

IN

S-VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

L

R

Y

VIDEO

OUT

ANTENNA

HDMI IN

antena de

VHF / UHF

empresa de

TV por cable

o

ANT. IN

cable

coaxial

de RF

cable coaxial

de RF

No incline el conector para introducirlo en la toma HDMI y compruebe que el tipo

de toma corresponde con el tipo de conector.

HDMI OUT

parte trasera de la unidad

cable HDMI

Esta conexión es

de Pasar a través

de la televisión

solamente

Cables suministrados:

• cable coaxial de RF x 1

Por favor, compre el resto de los cables necesarios en su tienda local.

•

HDMI emite

l

as seña

l

es

d

e vi

d

eo / au

d

io sin convertir

l

as en seña

l

es ana

l

ógicas

.

•

No es necesaria una conexión

d

e au

d

io.

Conexión Básica

Conexión a un Televisor con un Puerto Compatible con HDMI

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 125 2013/02/12 21:06:36

1

2

6

E

S

Panta

ll

a

d

e

l

panel fronta

l

Seña

l

d

e sa

l

i

d

a

d

e video

P

rogresivo de 48

0

Presione [HDMI

]

P

rogresivo de 72

0

Presione [HDMI

]

1080 entrelazad

o

Pres

i

one [HDMI

]

Progresivo de 108

0

Presione [HDMI

]

• El modo HDMI que no esté admitido por el

dis

p

ositivo de exhibición será

p

asado

p

or alto

.

ESPAÑOL

Modo HDMI

y

señales efectivas de salida

P

resione

[

HDMI

]

para seleccionar el modo de salida HDMI. Cada vez que se presiona

[

HDMI

]

el mo

d

o

d

e sali

d

a varía

c

omo s

i

gue

.

La conexión HDMI

h

ace que esta uni

d

a

d

transmita automáticamente

l

a reso

l

ución más a

d

ecua

d

a para su TV.

Cuando usted encienda este aparato por primera vez necesita seguir estos pasos.

1

Presione [STANDBY/ON

yy

]

.

En

c

i

e

n

da

e

l

te

l

e

vi

so

r

.

Se

l

ecc

i

o

n

e

l

a

e

n

t

r

ada

a

la cual está conectado el a

p

arato

.

2

Utilice

[

K

/

L

]

p

ara seleccionar su

idioma deseado,

y

luego presione

[OK]

p

ara establecerlo

.

Initial Setup

Language

English

Français

Español

Elija idioma de preparación.

3

Utilice

[

K

/

L

]

para seleccionar el tipo de

seña

l

d

e emisión, y

l

uego presione [OK].

Ajuste inicial

Ajuste Auto escaneará los canales terrrestres.

Esto tarda unos momentos en finalizar.

Ajuste de Canal

Verificar que la antena esté

conectada a la toma "ANTENNA IN".

Antena

Cable (Analógico)

Cable (Analógico/Digital)

E

l

equipo comenzará a o

b

tener

l

os cana

l

es

d

isponi

bl

es en su región

.

4

Uti

l

ice

[

{

/

{

B

] para se

l

eccionar un

elemento a configurar, y utilice [

K

/

L

]

para se

l

eccionar e

l

conteni

d

o

d

e su

pre

f

erencia, y luego presione [OK]

.

Ajste Manual de Reloj

ENE / 06 / 2012 ( VIE )

12 : 00 AM

Configuración Inicial

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 126 2013/02/12 21:06:37

Function Setup OthersEditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

12

7

ES

ESPAÑOL

1

P

resione

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

p

ara abrir la bandeja de

d

i

scos

e

in

se

r

ta

r

su

d

i

sco

c

on el rótulo aupntando

hacia arriba. A

p

untando

d

e nuevo

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

p

ara cerrar la bande

j

a de discos.

*

Asegúrese de que el disco sea compatible con

este aparato. (Para obtener la lista de discos

compatibles consulte la página 124.

)

2

Para seleccionar un modo de grabación

p

resione re

p

etidamente [REC MODE].

Mejor

Buena

18 min

36 min

45 min

54 min

72 min

108 min

60 min

120 min

150 min

180 min

240 min

360 min

HQ

SP

SPP

LP

EP

SLP

Calidad del video

y el sonido

Modo de

grabación Tiempo de grabación

Mejor

Buena

61 hrs

123 hrs

154 hrs

185 hrs

247 hrs

371 hrs

100 hrs

201 hrs

251 hrs

302 hrs

403 hrs

604 hrs

208 hrs

417 hrs

521 hrs

626 hrs

835 hrs

1252 hrs

HQ

SP

SPP

LP

EP

SLP

Calidad del video

y el sonido

Modo de

grabación Tiempo de grabación

Disco de 8 cm Disco de 12 cm

HDD (interno)

MDR533H MDR535H MDR537H

3

Seleccione un canal externo de

entrada adecuado presionando

[

SOURCE] o [CHANNEL

/

].

Presione [DTV/TV] para seleccionar TV

analógica o TV digital, luego y utilice

[

CHANNEL

/

] o [

l

os

b

otones

numéricos] y [ • ] (para canales de TV

d

i

g

ital) para seleccionar un canal que

se desee grabar.

Consulte “Switching Analog Mode/Digital Mode”

y “Channel Selection” en la página 35.

4

Presione [REC] para iniciar la

g

rabación

.

Para configurar la grabación a un toque

con tem

p

orizador (OTR)...

Esta es una manera sencilla de con

f

igurar el tiempo de

gra

b

ación en

bl

oques

d

e 30 minutos.

P

resione

[

REC

]

repetidamente hasta que aparezca en la

panta

ll

a

d

e

l

te

l

evisor

l

a

l

ongitu

d

esea

d

a

d

e gra

b

ación

(30 minutos a 6 horas)

.

Comenzará la

g

rabación a un toque con temporizador.

(grabación normal) 0h30m 1h00m

5h30m6h00m

I 0h30m

Para cambiar la duración de la

g

rabación durante la

g

rabación a un toque con temporizador:

Pr

es

i

o

n

e

[

REC

]

repetidamente hasta que aparezca la

d

uración deseada.

Para cancelar la grabación a un toque con

temporizador dentro del tiempo especificado

:

Pr

es

i

o

n

e

[

STOP

C

]

.

5

Para de tener la grabación presione

[

STOP

C

]

.

Si uste

d

está repro

d

ucien

d

o

l

os títu

l

os

d

e una uni

d

a

d

e

d

isco rígi

d

o, presione primero

[

HDD

]

y

l

uego continúe a

l

paso 2.

Si uste

d

está repro

d

ucien

d

o

l

os títu

l

os

d

e un DVD, presione primero

[

DVD

]

.

Grabación Básica

1

Presione [OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

para abrir la bandeja de

d

iscos e insertar su disco

con e

l

rótu

l

o aupntan

d

o

h

acia arri

b

a. Apuntan

d

o

d

e nuevo [OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

para

cerrar la bandeja de discos

.

* Ase

g

úrese de que el disco sea compatible con

este a

p

arato. (Para obtener la lista de discos

compatibles consulte la pá

g

ina 124.

)

2 Para iniciar una reproducción

presione [PLAY B].

3

Para detener momentáneamente la

reproducción presione [STOP C]

una vez.

• Consulte “Resume Playback” en la página 74.

Si usted está reproduciendo los títulos de una unidad de disco rígido, presione primero [HDD] y luego continúe al paso 2.

Si usted está reproduciendo los títulos de un DVD, presione primero [DVD].

Reproducción Directa

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 127 2013/02/12 21:06:37

1

2

8

E

S

Preparación para el copiado (unidad de disco rígido a DVD):

• Inserte un DVD gra

b

a

bl

e

.

Preparación para el copiado (DVD a unidad de disco rígido):

• Inserte un disco a ser copiado.

1 Presione [MENU] en el modo de

detención.

2

Utilice

[

K

/

L

]

p

ara seleccionar

“

Doblaje”, y luego presione [OK].

3

Unidad de disco rígido a DVD

Uti

l

ice [

K

/

L

] para se

l

eccionar

“

HDD DVD”, y luego presione [OK]

.

DVD a Unidad de disco rígido

Utilice

[

K

/

L

] para seleccionar

“

D

V

D

HDD”,

y

luego presione [OK]

.

4

Utilice

[

K

/

L

]

p

ara seleccionar

“Aña

d

ir”,

y

l

uego presione [OK].

HDD DVD

3000 MB

Lista doblaje

Añadir

Borrar todo

Inic de doblaje

5

Uti

l

ice [

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

] para se

l

eccionar

un títu

l

o

d

esea

d

o, y

l

uego presione

[

OK

]

.

En

l

a esquina superior

d

e ca

d

a títu

l

o aparece e

l

n

ú

m

e

r

o

e

n

el

o

r

de

n

de

selecc

i

ó

n

.

6

Repita e

l

paso 5

h

asta que

h

aya

registra

d

o to

d

os

l

os títu

l

os que

d

esea copiar; a continuación,

presione [DUBBING]

.

Lista de Títulos

1 / 6

ABCDE

12:00AM (10:00:00) VIE ENE/ 6/12

CH10 SP

1

4 5 6

2 3

2 5 4

1 3

Plus. ‘DUBBING’ y confirme.

7

Luego de añadir todos los títulos que

d

esea, utilice

[

K

/

L

] para seleccionar

“Inic de doblaje” en el menú de

copiado, y luego presione [OK].

8

Uti

l

ice

[

s

/

B

] para se

l

eccionar un

modo de grabación deseado, y luego

presione [OK].

9

Utilice [

K

/

L

] para seleccionar “Sí”, y

luego presione [OK].

E

l

copia

d

o comenzará

.

Para detener el copiado en curso:

Presione

[

CSTOP

]

en el panel frontal.

P

resione

[

STOP

C

]

en el control remoto durante

2 segun

d

os.

A la hora de realizar una copia del HDD al DVD

aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación;

seleccione “Sí”

.

Copiado a un toque......

Con el copiado a un toque, usted puede comenzar a

copiar de inmediato con sólo un toque.

Para copiar el contenido de un DVD que está finalizado

en otro equipo, utilice esta función

.

Durante

l

a repro

d

ucción

d

e

l

títu

l

o que

d

esea

copiar, presione [DUBBING]

.

Si usted está reproduciendo un DVD, el copiado del DVD

a la unidad de disco rígido comenzará de inmediato.

Si usted está reproduciendo una unidad de disco rígido,

el copiado de la unidad de disco rí

g

ido al DVD

co

m

e

nz

a

r

á

de

inm

ed

i

ato.

• El copiado comenzará desde el comienzo del título que

está sien

d

o repro

d

uci

d

o

.

• E

l

aparato só

l

o copiará e

l

títu

l

o que está sien

d

o

reproducido

.

• Cuando se copia de una unidad de disco rí

g

ido a un

DVD, el modo de

g

rabación será confi

g

urado

automáticamente a “Alto” cada vez que se satisfagan las

condiciones (consulte la página 54). De lo contrario, será

aplicado automáticamente el último modo de

g

rabación seleccionado.

Para detener el co

p

iado en curso

:

Presion

e

[

C

STOP

]

en el panel frontal

.

Presione

[

STOP

C

]

en el control remoto durante 2 se

g

undos.

A la hora de realizar una copia del HDD al DVD aparecerá un

mensaje de confirmación; seleccione “Sí”

.

ESPAÑOL

Copiado Básica

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 128 2013/02/12 21:06:37

Function Setup OthersEditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

1

2

9

ES

MEMO

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 129 2013/02/12 21:06:38

130

E

S

MEMO

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 130 2013/02/12 21:06:38

Function Setup OthersEditingPlaybackRecording

Basic Setup

ConnectionsIntroduction Español

13

1

ES

MEMO

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 131 2013/02/12 21:06:38

E2S05UD

/

E2S07UD

/

E2S08UD

/

E2S05UH

/

E2S07UH

/

E2S08U

H

1VMN

3

29

33

A

★★★★

Prin

ted

in

C

hin

a

LIMITED

W

A

R

RANT

Y

F

U

NAI

CO

R

P.

will r

P.

e

pair t

h

is pr

oduct,

fr

,

ee o

f

charge in the U

S

A in the e

v

en

t

of

de

f

e

ct

in ma

t

erial

s

o

r

wo

rkmanship as

f

ollows

:

DURA

TION:

A

P

A

R

TS:

R

FUNAI COR

P.

will pr

P.

ovide

p

a

r

ts to r

ep

lace defective

p

a

r

ts without char

g

e for one

(

1

)

y

e

a

r fr

o

m the

date of ori

g

inal

r

etail

p

u

r

c

hase

.

C

er

t

ai

n

p

ar

t

s are excluded f

r

om this warranty

.

y

LAB

O

R

:

FU

NAI

CO

R

P.

will pr

P.

ovide the labor without charge for a period of ninety (90) da

ys fr

a

o

m

t

he da

t

e

o

f

origina

l

r

e

tai

l

pur

ch

ase

.

N

ote:

A

ny

p

roduct sold and identified as r

e

furbished or re

n

e

w

e

d carries a ninety (90) da

y

s

l

a

b

or

a

an

d

p

ar

t

s limited warrant

y

.

LIMITS AND EXCLUSIONS:

THI

S

W

ARRANTY IS EXTENDED ON

W

LY

T

O

THE ORIGINAL RET

AIL PURCHASER

T

.

A

P

U

R

C

HA

S

E RE

C

EIPT

OR O

THER

PR

O

OOF OF ORIGINAL RET

R

AIL PURCHASE

T

WILL BE RE

Q

UIRED

TO

G

ETHE

R

WITH

THE

PR

ODUCT

R

T

O

OBT

AIN SER

T

VICE UNDER

R

T

HIS

W

ARRANTY

W

.

Y

Th

is warranty s

h

a

ll

not

b

e exten

d

e

d

to an

y

other person or transfe

re

e

.

Th

is warranty is v

o

id and o

f

no e

ff

ect i

f

any seria

l

num

b

ers on t

h

e pr

od

uct ar

e

a

l

ter

ed

,

r

ep

l

ace

d

,

de

f

aced

,

mi

ss

i

ng

o

r if

s

ervice was attem

p

ted b

y

an unauthorized ser

v

i

c

e

c

en

te

r

.

This limited warrant

y

does not a

pp

l

y

to an

y

p

ro

d

uct not

p

ur

c

hased and used in the United States.

This warrant

y

onl

y

co

v

e

r

s

fail

u

r

es due to def

ects in material or w

f

o

rkmanshi

p

which occur durin

g

normal us

e.

I

t

d

oes not co

v

er

d

ama

g

e w

h

ic

h

occurs in s

h

i

p

men

t

,

o

r failur

e

s

w

h

ic

h

are cause

d

by

r

epairs,

alterations or

,

p

r

o

d

ucts not supp

l

ie

d

by

FUNAI COR

P

.

,

or

d

ama

g

e,

which

,

re

s

ults fr

om accident,

m

i

sus

e

,

ab

use

,

mishandling,

,

misapplication,

a

l

teratio

n

,

f

aulty installatio

n

,

i

mp

r

oper ma

i

ntenanc

e

,

c

o

mmer

c

ia

l

use suc

h

as

h

ote

l

,

r

e

nta

l

or

office use of this

pr

o

d

uct

,

or dama

g

e which

r

e

su

l

ts

f

r

o

m f

i

re

,

f

l

oo

d

,

li

g

htnin

g

or other acts of God

.

THI

S

WA

RRANTY DOES NO

T CO

O

V

E

R

O

P

A

CKING MA

A

TERIALS

A

,

A

N

Y

A

CCESSORIES (EXCEPT REM

AA

OT

E

CONTR

OL),

R

ANY COSMETIC P

A

R

TS,

RR

COMPLETE

,

ASSEMB

LY

PA

R

TS,

RR

DEMO OR FLOOR MODELS.

,

FUNAI CORP

.

P

AND IT

S

REPRE

S

E

N

TA

TIVES OR

A

G

ENT

S

HALL IN N

O

EVENT BE LIABLE F

O

R ANY GENERAL

,

INDIRECT OR CONSE

Q

UENTIA

L

D

A

MA

G

A

ES

A

RISING OUT OF OR O

C

ASIONED B

Y

T

H

E USE OF OR

T

HE IN

A

BILIT

Y

T

O USE

THIS PR

O

R

DUCT

.

T

THIS

WA

RRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF

A

LL O

THER

O

WA

RRANTIES

,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

,

D

AND OF

ALL O

THER LIABILITIES ON

O

THE

PA

RT

OF FUNAI,

T

ALL O

THER

O

W

A

R

A

NTI

E

S

INCLUDING

THE

WA

RRANTY OF MERCHANT

A

BILITY

T

A

ND FITNESS FOR

A

P

A

R

TICULAR PURPOSE,

RR

A

R

E

HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY FUNAI AND ITS REPRESENT

A

TIVES IN

AA

THE UNITED

S

T

AT

ES

.

A

L

W

ARRANTY INSPECTIONS

WW

A

ND RE

P

AIRS MUST BE PERFORMED BY

P

A

N

AU

TH

O

RIZED

S

ER

V

I

C

E

C

ENTE

R

.

THIS

W

ARRANTY IS ON

WW

LY

V

A

L

ID

WHEN

THE UNIT IS

C

A

RRIED-IN

T

O

A

N

A

U

T

HORIZED SE

RV

ICE CENTE

R

.

THE PR

ODUCT MUST BE

R

A

CCOM

PA

NIED BY

A COPY OF THE ORIGINAL R

E

TA

I

L PURCHASE RECEI

P

T

.

IF NO PR

OOF OF PURCHASE IS

R

AT

T

A

C

HE

D,

THE

W

ARRANTY

WW

WILL NO

T BE HONORED

O

AND REP

AIR

P

C

OSTS WILL BE CHARGED

.

I

MP

O

RT

AN

T

T:

THI

S

LIMITED

W

ARRANTY GIVES

W

Y

OU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS.

Y

O

U MA

YHA

A

VE

A

O

THER RI

G

HT

S

THA

T

A

VA

RY

FR

OM ST

RR

A

T

TE

A

T

O

ST

A

T

TE.

A

IF

.

, AT

FF

A

N

Y

TIME DURING

THE

W

ARRANTY PERIO

W

D,

YO

U

A

RE UNABLE T

O

OBT

AIN SA

T

TISF

A

F

C

TI

O

N

W

ITH

THE REP

AIR OF

P

THIS PR

ODUCT

R

,

T

PLEASE CONT

A

T

CT FUNAI CORP

.

P

A

TTENTION:

A

FUNAI CORP

.

P

RESER

VES

R

T

HE RI

G

HT T

O

M

O

DIF

Y

ANY DE

S

I

G

N

O

F

T

HIS PR

O

R

DUC

T

W

ITHOUT PRIOR NO

T

O

IC

E

.

WA

RRANTY ST

A

T

TEMENT REGARDING NON

A

AU

THORIZED REP

AIRS

P

:

T

o

obtain warrant

y

se

rv

ic

e

,

y

o

u

m

ust

t

ak

e

the pr

oduct,

r

o

r deli

v

,

er the pr

oduct fr

rr

ei

g

ht

pr

ep

aid

,

in either its ori

g

inal

packaging or packaging a

ff

or

d

ing an equa

l

d

eg

r

ee of pr

r

o

tect

i

o

n

r

,

t

o an

y

A

UTH

O

RIZED

SE

RV

ICE CENTER.

FUNA

.

I

CORP

.

P

w

ill n

ot

r

e

i

m

bu

r

s

e

y

o

u

f

o

r an

y

ser

v

ice done b

y

unauthorized s

e

r

v

ice

pr

oviders without prior written appr

r

ov

a

l

.

To

locate your near

e

s

t

A

UTHORIZED SER

VICE CENTER or for

R

ge

n

eral ser

vice inquiries,

please

,

co

n

tact

us

at:

FUNAI SER

VICE CORPORA

R

TION

A

T

e

l:

1-800-605-8610

:

www

.ma

w

gna

vo

a

x

.com/su

pp

or

t

2

200 S

p

ie

g

el Drive, Grove

p

ort, OH 43125

*1VMN32933A*

E2S05_07_08UD_UH_MDR533_535_537H_EN_v2.indd 132 2013/02/12 21:06:38

Philips MDR533H MDR535H MDR537H F7 Dfu Aen

MDR533H MDR535H MDR537H mdr533h_f7_dfu_est

MDR537H to the manual 1bcc417f-2345-48f9-9d1f-58f7038c0eab

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation